JP6810068B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

Some conventional game machines perform the effect during the game at different speeds in the first period and the second period, and suggest whether or not the effect is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example). , Patent Document 1).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines can set settings related to effects such as volume and light intensity by accepting movements of a player or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217841 JP-A-2017-006552

However, if the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is capable of setting the effect as in Patent Document 2, the progress speed of the setting changes during the execution of the setting related to the effect, and the player does not intend to set the setting. There is a problem that it will be done.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from making an unintended setting.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect related to a game (for example, a hold change effect) (for example, a portion that executes a process during effect symbol change after the effect control CPU 101 executes a look-ahead advance notice process).
A setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 shows in FIG. 33) for setting the effect based on the player's operation (for example, the operation of the operation stick, the push button 120, the trigger button 125, and the volume / light amount change button 50). The part that executes the player setting process) and
With
The effect executing means can execute the effect at different progress speeds in the first period (for example, when the deceleration control is not executed) and the second period different from the first period (for example, when the deceleration control is executed). (For example, as shown in FIG. 17, when the deceleration control is executed, the hold change effect is executed at a slower speed (slow motion) than when the deceleration control is not executed).
The speed related to the setting in the setting means does not change between the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, a series of outputs from the speaker 27 when the volume is changed). The output of a series of sample lights output from the frame LED 28 when the sample sound or the amount of light is changed ends in a certain period, that is, the part output at a constant speed).
further,
A movable body (for example, an operation module 90M having an operation lever 9031) provided so as to be displaceable at a predetermined position (for example, a lower position of the pachinko gaming machine 901) that the player can contact with.
A control means for controlling the displacement of the movable body and
At least an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification regarding the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 performs sub-side error processing shown in FIG. 66) and
With
The movable body includes a first operating means that is interlocked and displaced, and a second operating means that is different from the first operating means, and can be displaced from the first position to a second position that is different from the first position. And
The first operating means can be displaced based on the operation of the player when it is located at either the first position or the second position.
The second operating means can be displaced based on the player's operation when it is located at the first position, and cannot be displaced when it is located at the second position.
When the player's operation on the second operating means is urged, it is highly expected that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than when the player's operation on the first operating means is urged.
Before the control for displacing the movable body to the second position is started (for example, the lever motor 9036 for displacing the operation lever 9031 is not operating and is located at the operable position). When the displacement of the movable body is hindered at one position, the control means does not start the control of displacement to the second position, and the abnormality notification means performs the first abnormality notification.
After the control to displace the movable body to the second position is started (for example, the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operation lever 9031 is operating and is being displaced from the operable position to the storage position). When the displacement of the movable body is hindered, the control means stops the control of displacement to the second position, and the abnormality notification means performs a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (for example). As shown in FIG. 68, when an operation lever error occurs due to the continuation of lever operation by the player, the error is notified in a manner in which an error display is displayed on the effect display device 905 but no error sound is output. In the event of an overload error in which the operation lever 9031 cannot be displaced due to a foreign object being caught, etc., the part that notifies the error by displaying an error display on the effect display device 5 and outputting an error sound)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from making unintended settings. In addition, it is possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The setting means is a specific image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 101) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a volume meter, a light amount meter, a volume / light amount adjustment screen) related to a setting that changes based on the movement of the player. 33 and the part that executes the player setting process shown in FIG. 34)
The speed at which the specific image changes in the specific image display means does not change between the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, regardless of whether or not deceleration control is executed. The volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen are updated in 2 ms).
According to this feature, an appropriate specific image corresponding to the setting can be displayed.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The setting means is a specific image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 101) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a volume meter, a light amount meter, a volume / light amount adjustment screen) related to a setting that changes based on the movement of the player. 33 and the part that executes the player setting process shown in FIG. 34)
The specific image display means limits the display of the specific image in the second period (for example, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during execution of the deceleration control as shown in the modification 3). , The part where the volume meter and the light amount meter are not displayed according to the update of the volume and the light amount in the effect display device 9 while updating the volume and the light amount)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort by executing the effect at a speed different from the changing speed of the specific image.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a setting effect (for example, output of a sample sound or a sample light) corresponding to the setting made by the setting means.
The setting effect can be executed in a common manner between the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a series of operations regardless of whether or not deceleration control is executed. The part that outputs the sample sound of the above in the period T4 and the part that outputs a series of sample lights in the period T5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the setting effect because the mode of the setting effect is different.
The "mode" includes an execution speed, a pitch, a period until the setting effect is started, an execution period of the setting effect, and the like.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 3.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a setting effect (for example, output of a sample sound or a sample light) corresponding to the setting made by the setting means.
In the second period, the execution of the setting effect is restricted (for example, as shown in the modification 4, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, the volume / light amount change button The part that does not output the sample sound or sample light at the volume and amount of light changed based on the operation of 50)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort by executing the setting effect in the second period.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is provided with an error notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the lower plate error detection process shown in FIG. 32) for notifying that an error has occurred.
The setting means can be set for the effect even during the execution of the notification by the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, regardless of whether or not the lower plate error is being notified. The part where the volume of sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 can be changed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's convenience regarding the setting from being lowered.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
When the setting by the setting means is performed in the second period, the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the setting in the second period (for example, from the speaker 27 during the execution of the deceleration control). When the volume of the output sound or the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 is changed, the part to be output at the changed volume or amount of light during the hold change effect in which the deceleration control is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the effect reflecting the player's setting is executed even in the second period, the interest of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A specific display means (for example, hold display area 18c or active display area AHA) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, active display AH or hold display H) corresponding to variable display is provided.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the action display to act on the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the color ball 931 is actively displayed as the hold change effect. A production that changes the display mode of the target active display AH or hold display H by acting on the AH or hold display H),
The first pattern (for example, the success pattern shown in FIG. 17C) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the specific display after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the display of the action display are started and predetermined. A second pattern (for example, the failure pattern shown in FIG. 17D) that does not change the display mode of the specific display after the elapse of the period can be executed.
After starting the display of the action display, it is possible to execute deceleration control for decelerating the speed of the action display with respect to the target specific display at a common timing in a predetermined period between the first pattern and the second pattern. (For example, as shown in FIG. 17B, the portion where the speed deceleration of the color ball 931 is started at the same timing at the time of success and at the time of failure).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following means 9 to 15. Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-106681, a game machine provided as a movable body, which is provided on the upper front surface of the game machine so as to appear and disappear, is used for production. There was one that monitors whether or not the accessory is stored in the predetermined origin position and notifies an abnormality when it is not stored in the origin position. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, as described in paragraph 0307, when the effect effect object to be monitored is an effect button provided at a position where the player can contact, the effect button may be used. There is a problem that it is not possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation, and it is not possible to grasp under what circumstances these production buttons have become abnormal. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of performing abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means 9 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901).
A movable body (for example, an operation module 90M having an operation lever 9031) provided so as to be movable at a position where the player can contact (for example, a position below the pachinko gaming machine 901),
At least an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification regarding the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 performs sub-side error processing shown in FIG. 66) and
With
When the movable body is in the first state (for example, the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operating lever 9031 is not operating and is located at the operable position), the operation of the movable body is hindered. At times, in a second state in which the movable body is different from the first state (for example, the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operating lever 9031 is operating and is being displaced from the operable position to the retracting position). The mode of the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means is different from that when the operation of the movable body is hindered at a certain time (for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the operation due to the continuation of the lever operation by the player). In the case of a lever error, the error display is displayed on the effect display device 905, but the error is notified in a manner that does not output an error sound, and the operation lever 9031 cannot be displaced due to a foreign object being caught, etc. Occasionally, an error display is displayed on the effect display device 5 and an error sound is output to notify the error)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9.
An operation means (for example, an operation module 90M) including an operation body (for example, an operation lever 9031) that can be operated by a player is provided.
The movable body is characterized in that it is an operating body of the operating means (for example, an operating lever 9031).
According to this feature, even if the movement of the movable body is hindered by an erroneous operation or the like by the player, it is possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or the means 10.
The abnormality notification means is
The abnormality notification of the first aspect by the abnormality display (for example, the error notification shown in FIG. 68 (a)) and the abnormality notification of the second aspect by the output of the abnormal sound and the abnormality display (for example, the error shown in FIG. 68 (b)). Notification) and can be executed,
When the movement of the movable body is hindered when the movable body is in the first state, the abnormality notification of the first aspect is executed, and when the movable body is in the second state, the movement of the movable body is performed. When disturbed, the abnormality notification of the second aspect is executed (for example, when the lever operation error occurs, the error notification shown in FIG. 68 (a) is executed, and when an overload error occurs, FIG. 68 (b) shows. The part that executes the error notification shown)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the difference in the mode of abnormality notification, so that the state of the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of the means 12 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 11.
A driving means (for example, a lever motor 9036) for displacing the movable body (for example, an operation lever 9031) to an operable position (for example, an operable position) is provided.
The state in which the movable body is not in displacement (for example, the state in which the operating lever 9031 is located at the operable position) is the first state, and the state in which the movable body is in displacement (for example, the operating lever 9031 is located). The state of being displaced from the operable position to the storage position) is the second state.
The drive means stops driving when the operation of the movable body is hindered in the second state (for example, when it is determined that an overload error is caused by the overload of the lever motor 9036, the drive means is used for the lever in S90326. The part that stops the drive (operation) of the motor 9036)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent damage to the driving means and the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 13 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 12.
The movable body effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) that can execute the movable body effect (for example, the operation lever effect) using the movable body executes the lever protrusion process of S90311 to store the operation lever 9031. The part that executes the operation lever effect that displaces from to the operable position)
The movable body effect executing means limits the execution of the movable body effect when the abnormality notification means is executing the abnormality notification regarding the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 causes a lever operation error flag or an error flag or an error flag. When the load error flag is set, the part where the lever protrusion process is not executed by proceeding from S90309 to S90340)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate movable body effect from being executed by performing the movable body effect in a state where an abnormality has occurred.

The gaming machine of the means 14 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 13.
A driving means (for example, a lever motor 9036) for operating the movable body between an origin position and a position (for example, an operable position) away from the origin position (for example, a storage position in the case of the operating lever 9031). )When,
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a lever protrusion process) and
With
The control means
First operation control for locating the movable body at the origin position (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 performs non-detection operation control in steps S90105 to step S90114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control, and step S90120. The second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally and the part for executing the detection operation control in step S90128 are used as the second operation control. The second initialization process step S90201 to the part that executes the actual operation confirmation motion control in steps S90213 and the third motion control for performing the effect by the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is the effect symbol. It is possible to perform the lever protrusion processing of S90311 and the operation lever effect) during the period during which the fluctuation display of the above is being executed.
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of the first speed and the second speed faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is for checking the actual operation. When the motion control is executed, the movable accessory is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Part to do),
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 does not detect as the first operation control). When executing the operation control or the operation control at the time of detection, the speed is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). The part that controls the movement of the movable accessory)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be safely positioned at the origin position.

The gaming machine of the means 15 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 14.
Detection means (for example, push button 9031A or operation lever 9031) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A portion in which a specific display executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a process of displaying an image of the push button 9031A or an image of the operation lever 9031 in the modified example shown in FIG. 70) that performs a specific display corresponding to the detection means. )When,
With
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, an image of the push button 9031A in the modified example) and a second specific display (for example, the operation lever 9031 in the modified example) which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display. Image) can be displayed,
After displaying the first specific display, the second specific display is displayed by executing an action effect (for example, an effect in which the character fires a bullet to hit the image of the push button 9031A) that acts on the specific display. The feature is that it can be displayed.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand that the first specific display is changed to the second specific display by executing the action effect, so that the effect can be improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning sound output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display effect processing. It is a figure which shows the hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the hold change effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the pending change mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the deceleration period determination table. It is a figure which shows the effect execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the active hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the active hold change effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the active hold final color determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the start position of an effect, success rate and change rate. It is a timing chart which shows the light emitting mode of the 1st special symbol display, the 2nd special symbol display and the frame LED. It is a flowchart which shows operation effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the lower plate error detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the player setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the player setting process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device when the push button is operated during non-variation. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device at the time of operating a volume / light amount change button during fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a sample sound. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a sample light. It is a figure which shows the update mode of the volume meter and the light amount meter, and the update mode of the volume light amount adjustment screen. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a winning sound. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 (one announcement) of the active hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 (timer change effect) of the active hold change effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of a timer change effect. It is a figure which shows the timer change effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the timer change effect execution time determination table. It is a figure which shows the change | change number determination table for timer change effect. It is a figure which shows the change pattern determination table for the timer change effect. It is a figure which shows the change timing determination table for the timer change effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a timer change effect. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation module provided below the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates the production control command. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the production symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the state of an operation lever and error notification. It is a figure which shows the error notification example. It is a figure which shows the production example which used the operation lever in super reach. It is a figure which shows the production example in the modification.

Hereinafter, examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine, and a game capable of playing a game. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is a machine.

Hereinafter, examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into a gaming area 7 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into a game area.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. Further, a game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 122 is designated by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and pushing and pulling the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 125 or the like. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122. The surplus supply tray (lower plate) 4 is also provided with a lower plate sensor 130 that can detect that a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the lower plate 4.

On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

Further, the member forming the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3 has a volume and an amount of light for adjusting (changing) the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of the light output from the frame LED 28, which will be described later. A change button 50 is also provided. The volume / light amount changing button 50 in this embodiment is a button formed in a substantially cross shape in front view, and the player operates the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the volume / light amount changing button 50. The volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be changed, and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 can be changed by operating the right end and the left end of the volume / light amount change button 50. ..

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, there is a first special symbol display 8a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display 8b that variablely displays the second special symbol as the identification information of the above is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b is the second. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, at the time of reach, an unusual effect may be performed by LED or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color) of a background image of the effect display device 9 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a that variablely displays the first special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them is provided. The first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying a special symbol such as a number from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right side of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second) that variablely displays the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them. Fluctuation display unit) 8b is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying a special symbol such as a number from 0 to 9.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the game machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area) is provided. In the hold display area, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (hold storage image by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number.) Is displayed. By providing the hold display area for displaying the total number in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions for which the start condition for variable display is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 20 repeatedly controls the open state and the closed state repeatedly. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is open is called a round. As a result, repetitive continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variablely displaying normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 10 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or It is closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", the probabilistic state is a state in which after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a higher probability that the special gaming state will be determined to be a big hit as compared with the normal state (normal gaming state that is not the probabilistic state). The type of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for a probability fluctuation state, also called a high probability state) is called a "probability variation jackpot". Further, in the present embodiment, as the special gaming state, the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol may be controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. is there. It should be noted that the special gaming state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability change state.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Of the "big hits", the type of big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be controlled to the electric chew support control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning of the variable winning ball device 15. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes control that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and the normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to start and win a prize (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 14 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a control for facilitating the winning of the variable winning ball device 15, that is, the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. .. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. In addition, the normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board 31 (game control board) and the effect control board 80. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 built-in. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms the large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variable display of normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via a relay board 77 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Is received to control the variation display of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the LED driver board 35, and the display is controlled from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 to the I / O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the operation detection signals of the volume / light amount adjustment button 50, the push button 120, and the trigger button 125, and is based on the sound volume output from the speaker 27 and the light output from the frame LED 28. The amount of light can be changed. Further, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the lower plate 4 based on the reception of the detection signal from the lower plate sensor 130.

Further, in the ROM 102 mounted on the effect control board 80, various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 102 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, LED control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or one of probabilistic jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3 (MR3): The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R), the big hit type is one of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and any of the variation pattern types included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, and a reach fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-saving state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 5 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 5 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

5 (B) and 5 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5B shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation display of the first special symbol). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 5C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1) of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B, the numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 and the determination values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination). Value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches, and also determines the jackpot symbol in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. To do. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C is shown in FIG. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in a high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

In FIG. 6, (a) shows a table for determining when the normal state is out, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a table for determining when the time saving state is out. Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between the random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between the random 3 and the variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

In the column of "variation pattern type" or "variation pattern" in each table of FIG. 6, "normal" or "normal variation" indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

Further, the "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 6 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed to display a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

Further, as described above, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of selection when a big hit is made is higher than that of "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the "normal reach" (for example, the normal reach is 10 seconds and the super reach is 50 to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (a big hit) is such that the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach. (Possibility) is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) of the jackpot is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probability change) to shift to the probability change state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined effect is produced in the effect display device 9 from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol as the identification information and the variable display of the first and second special symbols until the display result is derived and displayed. An effect called pseudo-ream as an aspect (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo-ream effect) may be executed. The pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, which is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation.

In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the fluctuation time determined for one start prize in order to make it appear as if the variable display (variable display) of the symbol was executed a plurality of times for one start prize. Refers to a special fluctuation pattern (also called a fluctuation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all the symbol sequences (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of repeated executions of re-variation (the total number of fluctuations including the initial fluctuation and the subsequent re-variation, also called the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations), the higher the reliability of the jackpot (the number of fluctuations will be different from that of the jackpot). The degree of the ratio selected when a big hit is obtained, the degree of the ratio of a big hit, that is, the degree of reliability of a big hit) is high with respect to all the selection ratios including time. More specifically, by increasing the ratio of selection when the jackpot is determined, it is suggested by the pseudo-continuous production whether or not the jackpot game state is reached. In the pseudo-ream variation pattern, a pseudo-ream symbol (for example, a symbol (number) to which a predetermined character or character is attached, which is not included in the effect symbol that is normally variablely displayed (basically variable display) in the effect display device 9). (Also called a symbol without a mark or a symbol dedicated to pseudo-ream)) is temporarily stopped. In the pseudo-ream, the effect symbol (numerical symbol in the present embodiment) that is normally displayed in a variable manner (basically a variable display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols that are temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a combination of temporarily stopped symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined from among a plurality of types of chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive chance eyes) consisting of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. It should be done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect in which the effect symbol slides may be performed. Here, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display. In the second super reach, after that, in the left and right symbol display areas, one of the two effect symbols that was temporarily stopped at the out-of-order (combination of out-of-order symbols) slips and then stops to reach the reach (reach). It is an effect that forms a combination of symbols) and executes a reach effect.

The fluctuation pattern shown in the deviation determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "off". The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "normal jackpot". The fluctuation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation jackpot".

Based on this information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of "fourth super reach (80 seconds)" shown in the "variation pattern" column of FIG. 6A has a fluctuation time of 60, which is an out-of-order display result. It is shown to be a "fourth superreach variation pattern" executed in seconds.

In the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type" function as a variation pattern type determination table unit showing the relationship between "random 2 range" and "variation pattern type". It is a column to show. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, all the values of random 2 (1-251) are plural for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach", and "super reach". It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, in FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values of 1 to 251. , It is decided to set "normal reach" as the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as "random 3 range" and "variation pattern" indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit showing the relationship between the "random 3 range" and the "variation pattern". It is a column. The fluctuation patterns shown corresponding to each type of the fluctuation pattern type determination table are the fluctuation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "first super reach". 4 Super Reach ".

All the values of random 3 (1-220) are divided into a plurality of numerical values and assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach", the random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 out of the random values of 1 to 220. When it matches with any of the determination values assigned to ~ 70, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is “first super reach (50 seconds)”.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of alignment, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is out of alignment in the non-time saving state, the out-of-time determination table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variation display result is out of order, the time saving state out of time determination table shown in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the reach ratio is kept constant when the normal state is out of the normal state and when the time saving state is out of the range, regardless of the number of holdings.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit regardless of whether the time is shortened or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6C is selected. When the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of whether or not the time is shortened, the probabilistic jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6D is selected.

In the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (b), the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (a). Then, in the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) as compared with the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6 (a). The ratio determined for normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation (variation that results in out-of-reach display result without reaching)) is high, and the ratio determined for reach fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time than normal fluctuation is low. The data is set.

As a result, the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state (normal state), so that in the non-time saving state, the non-time saving state is selected. The fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time that is shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time to be shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-saving state.

In the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) selected when the data is out of alignment, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been done. On the other hand, in the judgment tables of FIGS. 6 (c) and 6 (d) selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such as normal reach <super reach. The data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the case of the loss, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. By producing the effect, the player's expectation can be increased.

Further, in the judgment table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the probability variation big hit is obtained among the big hits, the normal reach is achieved as compared with the judgment table of FIG. 6 (c) selected when the normal big hit is obtained among the big hits. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach effect is high. As a result, when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the proportion occupied by the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach production of the reach, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the probable change jackpot.

In addition, such a fluctuation pattern is when the total reserved storage number (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be variable-displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total reserved storage number is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different depending on whether the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is compared with the case where the total number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holds. However, even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of hold storages is 3 or more), the expectation for reach is maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. Further, it is also possible to execute the hold number time reduction control so that the fluctuation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Further, the hold number time reduction control may be feasible by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be feasible by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself. The combination may be used.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern of the effect symbol to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that specifies that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating the first hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second hold storage number designation command for designating the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

By transmitting a first hold storage number designation command for indicating the first hold storage number and a second hold storage number designation command for indicating the second hold storage number, the effect control microcomputer 100 It is possible to specify the number of reserved memories, but the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the variable display is executed, a command for specifying the number of reserved memories to subtract the first number of reserved memories or the second number of reserved memories is sent. As a result, the number of reserved storages may be specified in the effect control microcomputer 100.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S1217 and S1228 in FIG. 11), whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is a big hit at the time of starting winning, the type of the big hit, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type It is determined which judgment value range the value falls within. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and fluctuate. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the type command.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 560.

FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55 (the area in the RAM 55), and as shown in FIG. 8A, the maximum value of the total hold storage counter value for counting the total hold storage number (8 in this example). ) Corresponding area is secured. FIG. 8A shows an example in the case where the value of the total reserved storage counter is 5.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the reserved specific area is "first" or "second" in the order of winning based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. The data to be shown is set. Therefore, in the reserved specific area, data capable of specifying the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (hold storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 8B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot, which is a hardware random number (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type, which is a software random number (random 1), and a random number for determining a variable pattern type. (Random 2) and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random number 3) are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, these random values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

In this way, storing the above-mentioned information regarding the start winning prize in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random number 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process (random number 3). It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this way is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. In addition, before starting the variable display, which is the target for which the data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area is read at the time of starting winning and the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is started, a special symbol is displayed. It may be used for a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the variable display of.

When there is a start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, commands such as a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a total hold storage number designation command are sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Will be sent. In the start winning winning command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, various commands such as the received symbol specification command, variation type command, and total hold storage number specification command can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured.

In the present embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach effect. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various effects such as the effect display operation in the above, or various effect operations that do not involve the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial value (update processing for the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: S21). ..

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as a normal symbol hit judgment random number and a big hit type judgment random number used for game control is performed (judgment random number update process: S23). .. The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (S30).

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 describes the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, any of the processes S300 to S307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 13. The first hold storage buffer to be stored, and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 14. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed.

Regarding the following description of the hold storage, the fact that the information regarding the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". Further, the numerical data stored in the first hold storage buffer may be referred to as the first hold storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second hold storage buffer may be referred to as the second hold storage information.

The processes of S300 to S307 are as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the type of big hit when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number), and clocks the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20 according to the type of big hit. The process of opening the large winning opening (S306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. This is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S307). The jackpot end process (S307) is a process of performing control or the like for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1222. When the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1222.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (S1213) and increases the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Increase by 1 (S1214). Further, the CPU 56 is a total hold storage in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order in the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 described with reference to FIG. The data indicating "first" is set in the area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S1215).

In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), the data indicating "first" is set, and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins in the second start winning opening 14, data indicating “second” is set. For example, in the hold storage specific information storage area (holding specific area) shown in FIG. 8, when the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first”. When it is set and the second start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as the data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

As shown in FIG. 8A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold storage counter value is secured in the hold specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 or , Data indicating that the winning order is "first" or "second" is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is stored.

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. 8B). S1216). In the process of S1216, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the detected variation based on the starting winning is subsequently executed (S1217). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1219). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1220), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the total hold storage number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1221).

By executing the processes of S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the first start is performed regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.). Every time the winning opening 13 is started and a prize is won, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processes of S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning winning designation command and A set of four commands for specifying the total number of pending storages is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state (S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1224) and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Increase by 1 (S1225). Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "second" in the area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S1226).

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. 8B). S1227). In the processing of S1227, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. And stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing (S1228). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1229), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S1230). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1231), sets the value of the total hold storage counter in the EXT data, and issues the total hold storage designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1232).

By executing the processes of S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, the second start is performed regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.). Every time a start winning is made to the winning opening 14, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processes of S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second starting winning winning designation command and A set of four commands for specifying the total number of pending storages is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, if the customer wait state specification command has not been sent yet, the customer wait state specification command that specifies the customer wait state mode is executed. The process for transmitting is performed (S77), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, the customer waiting state specification command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting state specification command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting state specification command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait state specification command. Such a customer waiting state specification command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the CPU 56 determines that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area (see FIG. 8A) is "first". It is confirmed whether or not the data indicates (S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "first" (that is, the data indicating the "second") (N in S52), the CPU 56 uses the special symbol pointer (first). Data indicating "second" is set in the flag) indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "first" (Y in S52), the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (S54).

In the present embodiment, hereinafter, depending on whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is set. The variation display and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed by using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Is done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer. Is performed.

By executing the processes S52 to S54, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is changed or displayed in the order of the starting winnings in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 adds up the values (values indicating "first" or "second") stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m-1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched. Further, the order in which each value stored in each storage area corresponding to each total number of reserved storages is extracted always matches the order of total number of reserved storages = 1 to 8.

The count value of the total hold storage counter formed in the RAM 55 and counting the total hold storage counter is subtracted by 1 (S57). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in S1216 of the start port switch passage process and S1227 of the start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot. To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 5) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state). Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probabilistically changed between the probability variation jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 5A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 5A in ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is the normal play. When the state or time is shortened, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S61), the process proceeds to S71. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the jackpot end processing (S307 in FIG. 10) when the probability variation jackpot is reached, and then the condition that the next jackpot is determined, or the variation display that is the result of the missed display. When the condition that is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (S71). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 5 (C) are used. One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5C.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in S72. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (S73).

As shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 56 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined by S73 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variation jackpot", "7" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

In the display result designation command transmission process (S302) described above, the CPU 56 is one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation command that specifies the display result according to the determined type of jackpot or the loss. Controls to transmit the effect control command (see FIG. 7).

Further, in the above-mentioned special symbol changing process (S303), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer, and when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop processing (S304). Update to the value and proceed to the special symbol stop processing.

When a big hit is obtained as a result of the fluctuation display, the big hit opening pre-processing (S305), the big winning opening opening processing (S306), and the big hit end processing (S307) are executed to control the big hit game state. Will be done. In the jackpot end processing (S307), the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set at the end of the probability variation jackpot, and the time reduction flag is set at the end of the normal jackpot. As a result, after the end of the probabilistic jackpot, it is controlled to the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and after the end of the normal jackpot, it is controlled to the time saving state.

The probabilistic jackpot and the time saving state after the normal jackpot need to be continued until either of the conditions of the fluctuation display being executed 100 times and the occurrence of the next jackpot are satisfied. For such a continuation period of 100 fluctuation displays, in the jackpot end processing (S307), the time reduction counter indicating the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is set to 100 times, and every time the variation display is executed thereafter. It is managed by subtracting and updating in the special symbol stop processing, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving number counter, so that the time saving state is controlled to end.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) is performed (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (S705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol). Random number update processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating (various random numbers including) is executed (S706). Each of these random numbers is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and is extracted at a predetermined timing for each. It is used as a random number.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S707).

Next, the lower plate error detection process (S708) for detecting that a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the lower plate 4, the player operates the volume / light amount change button 50, the push button 120, the trigger button 125, and the like. By receiving the above, the player setting process (S709) for changing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of light output from the frame LED is executed.

By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 560, and in response to the received effect control command, the effect display device 9, various LEDs, and the effect control computer 100. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold display H and the active display AH in the winning sound output process (S498) that outputs the winning sound based on the occurrence of the start winning, the hold display H and the active display AH. After executing the hold display effect process (S499) for rotating display (animation display) at the position, determining whether to execute the look-ahead effect, and performing the look-ahead effect process (S500) for selecting the type of the look-ahead effect. , Any one of S800 to S807 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The winning sound output process (S498) is a process of outputting a winning sound based on the occurrence of a start winning as described above, and the hold display effect process (S499) displays the hold display H and the active display AH as described above. This is a process for rotating display (animation display) at the display positions of the hold display H and the active display AH.

The pre-reading effect processing (S500) is a process of determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 9 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of a process timer setting value and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a winning sound output process in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the winning sound output process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the winning sound output flag indicating that the winning sound is being output is set (S1002). If the winning sound output flag is set (S1002; Y), the process proceeds to S1008, and if the winning sound output flag is not set (S1002; N), the first start winning opening designation command reception flag or the first 2 It is determined whether or not the start winning opening winning designation command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (S1003). When the first start winning opening designation command receiving flag or the second starting winning opening winning designation command receiving flag is set (S1003; Y), the effect control CPU 101 sets the winning sound output flag (S1004). The process table for outputting the winning sound is selected (S1005). Then, the winning sound output process timer in the winning sound output process data 1 of the selected winning sound output process table is started (S1006).

In the winning sound output process table, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 and the like are associated with each winning sound output process data n (1 to N) in chronological order. It is arranged in order.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the winning sound from the speaker 27 according to the content of the winning sound output process data (sound control execution data 1), and ends the winning sound output process (S1007). For example, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70. When the first start winning opening designation command receiving flag and the second starting winning opening winning designation command receiving flag are not set (S1003; N), the effect control CPU 101 does not execute S1004 to S1007 and makes a winning sound. End the output process.

Further, in S1008, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the winning sound output process timer by -1, and determines whether or not the winning sound output process timer has timed out (S1009). When the winning sound output process timer is not timer-out (S1009; N), the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 according to the contents of the winning sound output process data corresponding to the winning sound output process timer, and the obtained sound is output. When the processing is completed (S1010) and the winning sound output process timer is timered out (S1009; Y), it is determined whether or not the winning sound output process timer that has been timered out is the last winning sound output process timer. Judgment (S1011).

If the winning sound output process timer that has been timered out is not the last winning sound output process timer (S1011; N), the winning sound output process data is switched (S1012), and the next winning sound output process timer is used. Start (S1013). Then, the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 according to the content of the winning sound output process data corresponding to the next winning sound output process timer, and the winning sound output process is completed (S1013). When the winning sound output process timer that has been timered out is the last winning sound output process timer (S1011; Y), the winning sound output flag is cleared and the winning sound output process ends (S1014).

By executing the winning sound output process as described above, as shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), in this embodiment, whether or not the variable display is in progress and the deceleration during the variable display are performed. Regardless of whether the control is being executed or not, a series of winning sounds is output over the period T6 based on the occurrence of the starting winning. That is, in this embodiment, the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 at the same speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is executed during the fluctuation display.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a hold display effect process in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the hold display effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 first refers to the hold storage specific information storage area and the like, and specifies the total number of hold storages (S1021). Then, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storages specified in S1021 matches the number of pending displays currently displayed on the reserved storage display unit (S1022). When the total number of pending storages specified in S1021 does not match the number of pending displays currently displayed (S1022; N), the process table for holding display effect corresponding to the total number of reserved storages specified in S1021 is selected (S1023). ), The process timer for the hold display effect in the process data 1 for the hold display effect of the selected process table for the hold display effect is started (S1024).

In the process table for the hold display effect, the effect display control data for rotating each hold display H and the active display AH around the vertical axis in the effect display device 9 is stored in each hold display effect process data n ( They are arranged in chronological order in association with (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect display (vertical of each hold display H and active display AH) of each hold display H and active display AH in the effect display device 9 according to the process data 1 for hold display effect (effect display control data 1). (Rotation display around the axis) is executed to end the hold display effect process (S1025).

Further, when the total number of reserved storages specified in S1021 matches the number of currently displayed pending displays (S1022; Y), it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 0 (S1026). When the total number of reserved storages is 0 (S1026; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is in progress (S1027). Whether or not the variation is being displayed is whether or not the value of the effect control process flag, which will be described later, is a value corresponding to any of the effect symbol change start process, the effect symbol change process, and the effect symbol change stop process. Should be determined. When the total number of hold storages is not 0 (S1026; N) or when the variable display is in progress (S1027; Y), the value of the hold display effect process timer is set to -1 (S1028), and the hold display effect process timer is set. It is determined whether or not the timer is out (S1029).

When the process timer for the hold display effect is not timered out (S1029; N), each hold display H and the active display in the effect display device 9 are displayed according to the contents of the process data for the hold display effect corresponding to the process timer for the hold display effect. The effect display of AH is executed, and the hold display effect process is terminated (S1030). When the hold display effect process timer is out of the timer (S1029; Y), it is determined whether or not the last hold display effect process timer has been timered out (S1032). When the timer is out of the last process timer for holding display effect (S1032; Y), the effect display of each hold display H and active display AH is repeatedly executed by executing the processes of S1024 and S1025. If it is not the last process timer for the hold display effect (S1032; N) that the timer is out, the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data for the hold display effect (S1033), and the next process for the hold display effect. The timer is started (S1034). Then, according to the contents of the process data for the hold display effect corresponding to the next process timer for the hold display effect, the effect display of each hold display H and the active display AH in the effect display device 9 is executed to end the hold display effect process ( S1035).

By executing the hold display effect process as described above, as shown in FIG. 17A, the hold display H and the active display AH in this embodiment are displayed on the effect display device 9 while they are displayed. It is rotated and displayed at a constant speed (speed V1 in this embodiment) around the vertical axis.

Here, the hold display H and the active display AH will be briefly described. As described above, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the hold storage display unit (total hold) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. A storage display unit and a hold display area) are provided. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the oldest displayed hold display H (hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the screen) is deleted. Further, the remaining hold display H is shifted one by one to the left. During execution of the variation display corresponding to the deleted (moved, shifted) hold display H, the active display area AHA that displays the active image (active display AH) indicating the variation correspondence display corresponding to the variation display is It is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. In the active display area AHA, the hold display H that has been erased with the start of the variable display corresponds to the hold display H that has been displayed so far, for example, it is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA. The active display AH is displayed in a manner that can be identified as. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.

The specific effect executed in this embodiment will be described. The specific effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the predetermined display corresponding to the variable display. The predetermined display corresponding to the variable display is, for example, a hold display H or an active display AH. Therefore, the specific effect is, for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display H or the active display AH. By changing the display mode of the hold display H or the active display AH, it is suggested that the hold display H or the active display AH is advantageous to the player. The advantage for the player is that, for example, the result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display H or the active display AH becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the hold display H or the active display AH is expected to be a big hit. It is to have a high reach.

In the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the display area of the variable display may be reduced during the specific effect so that the specific effect does not overlap with the various effects executed during the variable display. Further, the display area of the screen may be divided so that the area in which the effect related to the variable display is executed and the area in which the specific effect is executed can be distinguished. Further, another image display device may be provided so that a specific effect is executed in the display area. Further, the operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the predetermined operation means may be completed by the action display acting on the predetermined display so that the ball, sword, arrow, or the like collides with or pierces the predetermined display.

FIG. 17 shows a specific example of the specific effect of changing the display mode of the hold display H. Further, specific examples of the specific effect of changing the display mode of the active display AH are shown in FIGS. 24, 41, and 42, respectively. First, a specific example of a specific effect for changing the display mode of the hold display H will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a pending change effect. The hold change effect is an example of a specific effect related to the hold display H. Further, since the hold change effect is an effect of foretelling the operation related to the change display corresponding to the hold display by changing the mode of the target hold display H (hold display TH shown in FIG. 17), the look-ahead effect is produced. It is positioned as one of.

The hold change effect introduced here is whether or not the color of the target hold display TH changes when the color ball thrown toward one of the hold display H hits the target hold display TH and breaks. It is a production to show. The setting here is that the color ball always hits the target hold display TH, and the player is entertained with the effect of whether or not the ball breaks. Of course, it may be set so that the thrown ball does not hit the target hold display TH. If the ball breaks and the color of the hold display TH changes, the effect is successful, and if the ball does not break and the color of the hold display TH changes, it fails. When it succeeds, the expectation that the hold display TH is a big hit is higher than when it fails (see FIG. 19). The change of the color of the hold display TH to a color with a high degree of expectation such as a big hit is also called "upstart".

One of the features of the hold change effect of this embodiment is that the speed of the color ball thrown toward one of the hold display H slows down in the middle. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the case where the deceleration period is long is more likely to be successful than the case where the deceleration period is short (see FIG. 20). ). However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts decelerating after being thrown is the same.

Hereinafter, the effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. On the screen of the effect display device 9, various images are displayed during the variable display of the effect symbol indicated by the three downward arrows. At the lower end, a hold display TH or a hold display H for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed according to the number of hold storage information (hereinafter, referred to as a hold storage image or a hold display). In these hold display H, the hold storage image may be displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished. The active display area AHA is displayed at the lower left of the screen. The active display AH is displayed above the active display area AHA.

With reference to FIG. 17A, a character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the effect symbol. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set in various ways. However, it is necessary to prevent the production from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the production period from the appearance of the character 930 to the result of success or failure of the production. Therefore, the character 930 appears at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the effect period.

The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left among the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 hits the hold display TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period differs depending on whether the production succeeds or fails, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 931 changes during the predetermined period.

The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed from the time it is pitched until a certain period of time elapses (until it moves a predetermined distance), but when a certain period of time elapses, the speed decelerates. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 17 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, the effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball to when it enters the deceleration period is the same. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold display TH. The effect may be completed while decelerating without returning to the initial speed, or the speed after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the initial speed or the speed in the deceleration period. In the hold change effect shown in FIG. 17, the sound output from the speaker 27 as the hold change effect has a higher output speed (reproduction speed) from the speaker 27 when the deceleration control is executed than when the deceleration control is not executed. descend. That is, the sound output from the speaker 27 as a part of the hold change effect has different modes depending on whether the deceleration control is executed or not.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17B, each hold display H and active display AH during the deceleration period (during execution of deceleration control) has a constant speed around the vertical axis as a hold display effect (this implementation). In the example, the rotation is displayed at the speed V1). That is, each of the hold display H and the active display AH in this embodiment has the same speed of being rotated and displayed around the vertical axis as the hold display effect regardless of whether or not the deceleration period is in progress. It is prevented that the player mistakenly recognizes that the H and the active display AH are the displays during deceleration control. Further, in this embodiment, the speed at which the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA based on the occurrence of the start winning prize and the hold display H are displayed (increased display) in the hold display area based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. The speed is also unchanged regardless of whether or not it is in the deceleration period.

After that, the pattern of the production is a success pattern in which the colliding color ball 931 is broken and the paint inside covers the target hold display TH, and the color of the hold display is changed to a color different from the initial color, and the colliding color ball 931 It bounces without breaking and is divided into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display TH does not change. FIG. 17 (c) shows a success pattern, and FIG. 17 (d) shows a failure pattern. In the case of a success pattern, the push button 120 vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the success pattern is notified to the player (button notification effect). As a result, the player's expectation can be improved. Of course, the push button 120 may or may not vibrate. It should be noted that such advance notice may be performed by voice or image in place of the push button 120 or in addition to the push button 120. Further, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher when the push button 120 vibrates than when the push button 120 does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 120 may be adjusted in strength. In such a case, the lottery including the strength of the push button 120 may be performed at the time of the lottery for the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the push button 120 vibrates strongly than when the push button 120 vibrates weakly.

In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color to one of several colors. For example, its color variations are blue, green, and red. Such a difference in color represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest expectation of a big hit, followed by green and blue. The player can provide a more interesting game because he / she can pay attention to which color changes in the success pattern. In addition, in order to further raise the expectation for the color change, the movement of the ball may be temporarily stopped at the stage where the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH or at the stage immediately before the collision.

According to the hold change effect described above, there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 decelerates after the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the hold display TH. Therefore, during that period, the player You can raise your expectations. In particular, the player's expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of colliding with the hold display TH at the same speed without decelerating the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is selectively set from a plurality of deceleration periods, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while paying the player attention to the deceleration period.

During the execution of the hold change effect in this embodiment, the hold display H and the active display AH have a constant speed around the vertical axis regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed (speed V1 in this embodiment). ), The present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the hold display TH and the active display AH, which are the targets of the hold change effect, is different from the rotation speed of the other hold display H. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize which of the active display AH and the hold display H is the target of the hold change effect.

Further, the hold display H and the active display AH in the present embodiment are rotationally displayed around the vertical axis at a constant speed regardless of the display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these are held. The display H and the active display AH may have different operation modes such as rotation speed and rotation direction depending on the display mode.

In this embodiment, after the deceleration period ends and the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed, the color ball 931 collides with the target hold display TH or active display AH, so that the target hold display TH or active Although the mode in which the display mode of the display AH changes is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a button operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 120 is displayed on the effect display device 9 during the deceleration period. The display mode of the target hold display TH or active display AH may be changed by displaying and accepting the operation of the push button 120 during the display of the button operation promotion image. When the button operation promotion image is displayed during the deceleration period in this way, the image showing the state in which the push button 120 is not operated and the image showing the state in which the push button 120 is operated are repeated as the button operation promotion image. May be displayed. Further, while the button operation promotion image is being displayed during the deceleration period, the remaining reception period meter indicating the remaining reception period for the operation of the push button 120 is displayed together with the button operation promotion image, and the game is played according to the update mode of the remaining reception period meter. The person may be able to recognize the remaining acceptance period for the operation of the push button 120.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the pending change effect can be executed during the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display. It may be possible to execute a notice effect during fluctuations that suggests that it will be. Further, as such a variable advance notice effect, a button operation effect for displaying a predetermined image on the effect display device 9 may be executed by the player operating the push button 120.

Further, when the button operation effect can be executed as the notice effect during fluctuation, the effect display device 9 may display the button operation promotion image or the remaining reception period meter as in the above-mentioned hold change effect. In this way, when displaying the button operation promotion image or the remaining reception period meter during both the deceleration period of the hold change effect and the execution of the button operation effect, the update speed (push) of the button operation promotion image during the deceleration period. Switching speed of the image showing the state where the button 120 is not operated and the image showing the state where the push button 120 is operated) and the update speed of the remaining reception period meter are the update speed of the button operation promotion image in the button operation effect and the remaining reception The update speed of the period meter is the same, that is, the update speed of the button operation promotion image and the update speed of the remaining reception period meter are executed at the same speed (update speed) regardless of whether deceleration control is executed or not. You may.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a hold change effect execution decision table. The hold change effect execution decision table is used to determine whether or not to execute the hold change effect. In particular, FIG. 18A shows a hold change effect execution decision table at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 18B shows a hold change effect execution decision table at the time of loss. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The hold change effect execution decision table at the time of a big hit is a table used when the hold memory that is the target of the hold change effect is a big hit. The hold change effect execution determination table at the time of disconnection is a table used when the hold memory that is the target of the hold change effect is out of order. In each table, whether or not to execute the hold change effect is sorted by the random number SR2 and drawn by lottery. As shown in the figure, the proportion of "Yes" selected in the big hit hold change effect execution decision table is higher than that in the out-of-order hold change effect execution decision table. Random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the hold change effect is executed than when it is not executed. By using the hold change effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the player can be interested in the hold change effect.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending change mode determination table. The hold change mode determination table is used to determine the color change of the hold display H in the hold change effect. In particular, FIG. 19 (A) shows a table for determining the mode of change on hold at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 19 (B) shows a table for determining the mode of change on hold at the time of loss. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The hold change mode determination table at the time of a big hit is a table used when the hold memory, which is the target of the hold change effect, is a big hit. The hold change mode determination table at the time of loss is a table used when the hold memory, which is the target of the hold change effect, is lost. In each table, the change in the color of the hold display H is sorted by the random number SR3 and drawn.

There are success patterns and failure patterns in the pending change effect (see FIG. 17). The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball is broken and the color of the hold display H changes, and at that time, the color of the hold display changes to any of blue, green, and red. The failure pattern is a pattern in which the color ball does not break, and therefore the color of the hold display H does not change. The changed color of the hold display H suggests the degree of expectation that the hold display H corresponds to the jackpot. For example, red has the highest degree of expectation of the jackpot, the next is green, and the next is blue. In addition, the jackpot expectation when the color does not change is lower than in any case where the color changes. In this way, in order to be able to suggest the jackpot expectation degree according to the color, the random number SR3 corresponding to each color is assigned as shown in FIG. 19 in the pending change mode determination table. The color of the hold display H before the color changes may be any other than blue, green, and red, and is, for example, white.

By using the hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the color of the hold display H changes, but also to the changing color.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a deceleration period determination table. The deceleration period determination table is used to determine the deceleration period when the deceleration control of the color ball is executed in the hold change effect. The deceleration period is the period from when the speed of the color ball released by the character starts decelerating to a speed different from the initial speed until the deceleration is completed. In particular, FIG. 20A shows a deceleration period determination table for success patterns, and FIG. 20B shows a deceleration period determination table for failure patterns. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The deceleration period determination table for the success pattern is a table used when the pending change effect is set as the success pattern. The deceleration period determination table for the failure pattern is a table used when the pending change effect is set as the failure pattern. In each table, whether the deceleration period is set to 3 seconds or 5 seconds is sorted by the random number SR4 and drawn. As shown in the figure, the deceleration period determination table for the success pattern has a higher ratio of selecting the deceleration period of 5 seconds than the deceleration period determination table for the failure pattern. Random numbers are distributed so that the expectation that the pending change effect will be a success pattern is higher when the deceleration period is long than when it is short. Here, 3 seconds and 5 seconds are illustrated as a plurality of deceleration periods, but other deceleration periods may be adopted, or three or more deceleration periods may be adopted. The deceleration period may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit.

In this way, since the degree of expectation that becomes a success pattern differs depending on the difference in the deceleration period, the player can pay attention to the deceleration period. In particular, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character throws the ball to when it enters the deceleration period is the same, so the player decelerates when the ball starts decelerating. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the player without realizing the length of the period.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect execution timing determination table. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The effect execution timing determination table is used to determine how many times the hold display H is shifted to execute the hold change effect when there are a plurality of hold display H. When a plurality of hold display H exists, the hold display TH that is the target of the hold change effect is the hold display H that is digested last among the plurality of hold display H. For example, if there are three hold displays H, the third hold display TH from the left is the target of the hold change effect, and if there are eight hold displays H, the eighth hold display TH from the left is held. It is the target of change production. Using the effect execution timing determination table, it is determined by a random number lottery how many times the hold display TH of the target is shifted to the left (the stage where the hold memory is digested) to execute the hold change effect.

In the effect execution timing determination table, the ratio (percentage display) of the random numbers assigned to each execution timing of the hold change effect is shown according to the total number of hold storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, when the total number of hold storages is 2, the second hold display TH from the left is the target of the hold change effect, but the timing of the effect in this case is when one shift occurs (number of shifts). = 1) is determined. That is, when the hold display H on the left side of the two hold display H changes to the active display AH and the hold display TH on the right side shifts to the left, the hold change effect is started.

When the total number of pending memories is 4, the fourth pending display from the left is the target of the H pending change effect, but the timing of the effect in this case is when one shift occurs (number of shifts = 1). ), When two shifts occur (number of shifts = 2), and when three shifts occur (number of shifts = 3), it is determined by a random number lottery. The determination ratio is 45% for the number of shifts = 1, 30% for the number of shifts = 2, and 25% for the number of shifts = 3.

As can be understood from the effect execution timing determination table, regardless of the total number of hold storages, the rate at which the hold change effect is executed when the number of shifts is small is higher than the rate at which the hold change is performed when the number of shifts is large. Higher than the rate at which the production is performed. As a result, the chances of executing the pending change effect can be increased as much as possible.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead advance notice process. According to this flowchart, the pending change effect is realized. This flowchart is a subroutine of S500 of FIG. First, it is determined by the effect control CPU 101 whether or not the deceleration control is already being executed (S501a). If the deceleration control is already being executed, the look-ahead advance notice effect processing is terminated, and if the deceleration control is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the total hold storage number specification command and the variation type command are being received ( S501b). The process ends when those commands are not received, but when those commands are received, it is determined whether or not the change effect restriction flag has already been set (S502). The change effect restriction flag is a flag in which the set state is held from the time when the execution presence of the hold change effect is determined until the end of the effect. The change effect restriction flag is a flag for preventing a new execution of the hold change effect from being decided even though the hold change effect has not been completed.

Therefore, the process ends when the change effect restriction flag is set, but when it is not set, it is determined whether or not the total number of pending items is 2 or more (S503). If the total number of holds is not 2 or more, the process ends because the hold change effect is not performed, but if the total number of holds is 2 or more, whether or not the new hold memory is a reach variation pattern type. Judgment (S504). Here, the "new hold memory" is the latest hold memory among the plurality of hold memories (S503), in other words, the hold memory corresponding to the hold display H displayed on the far right. That is. As already described with reference to FIG. 22, such a hold memory can be selected as the target of the hold change effect. Therefore, in S505, it is determined whether or not the hold memory that can be selected as the target of the hold change effect is a big hit.

When it is determined in S505 that the new hold memory is a big hit, whether or not the hold change effect is executed is determined by the big hit hold change effect execution decision table (S506), and the hold change is changed in S507 (hold change effect). When it is determined that there is), the pending change mode is subsequently determined by the jackpot pending change mode determination table (S508). The pending change mode is roughly classified into a success pattern and a failure pattern. The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball that hits the hold display TH breaks and the color of the hold display changes, and the failure pattern is a pattern in which the color ball that hits the hold display TH bounces off without breaking, and as a result, the hold display TH It is a pattern that does not change color. The success pattern is further divided into three patterns in which the changing hold display TH color is blue, green, and red. In S508, it is determined whether to make a failure pattern or three success patterns. When it is determined in S507 that there is no pending change (no pending change effect), the process ends. The jackpot hold change effect execution determination table is as shown in FIG. 18 (A), and the jackpot hold change mode determination table is as shown in FIG. 19 (A).

When it is determined in S505 that the new hold memory is out of order, whether or not the hold change effect is executed is determined by the hold change effect execution determination table at the time of loss (S515), and the hold change is changed in S515 (hold change effect). When it is determined that there is), the pending change mode is subsequently determined by the pending change mode determination table at the time of disconnection (S517). In S517, it is determined whether the failure pattern or the color of the changing hold display TH is one of the three success patterns of blue, green, and red. In S516, when it is determined that there is no pending change (no pending change effect), the process ends. The holding change effect execution determination table at the time of disconnection is as shown in FIG. 18 (B), and the holding change mode determination table at the time of disconnection is as shown in FIG. 19 (B).

In the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined as the success pattern (YES in S509), the deceleration control period is determined by the deceleration period determination table for the success pattern (S510). On the other hand, in the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined as the failure pattern (NO in S509), the deceleration control period is determined by the failure pattern deceleration period determination table (S510). The deceleration period determination table for the success pattern is as shown in FIG. 20 (A), and the deceleration period determination table for the failure pattern is as shown in FIG. 20 (B). As shown in FIG. 20, the deceleration control period (deceleration period) is determined to be either 3 seconds or 5 seconds.

In S510, after the deceleration period for the success pattern is determined, it is determined to execute the button notification effect (S511). As described with reference to FIG. 17, the button notification effect is an effect of notifying the player of the success pattern by vibrating the push button 120 before the color ball 931 breaks.

After S511 or S518, the change effect restriction flag is set (S512). Next, the execution timing of the hold change effect is determined by the effect execution timing determination table (S513). The effect execution timing determination table is as shown in FIG. By this process, it is determined how many times the hold display TH, which is the target of the hold change effect, is shifted before the hold change effect is executed. Next, the content determined in the pre-reading advance notice process is saved in the storage area (S514), and the process ends.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of the question (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of order is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designated command is stored in the display result designated command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, by the data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

When it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the display result of the missing symbol that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol by using the data table for determining the missing symbol stored in the ROM 102 (S604). , S616. In the data table for determining the outlier symbol, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

In the processing of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the data table for determining the missing symbol is used, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are left and middle, respectively. ， It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that will be the variable display result of the effect symbol on the right. In this way, when determining the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of jackpot symbols by chance, it is corrected so as to be the combination of out-of-reach symbols (for example). Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). If the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be a reach symbol, the stop symbol is corrected so that it is a combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols (for example, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol) and each stop symbol is used. Is determined.

When it is determined in the process of S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the processing of S605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is used by using the data table for determining the missing symbol. It is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number that matches the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. Further, in this case as well, when a combination of jackpot symbols is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the combination of out-of-order symbols (for example, correcting the middle symbol by shifting one symbol).

Further, when it is not decided to make a deviation in the processing of S601 (when it is decided to make a big hit) (N of S601), the effect control CPU 101 has a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination is determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616.

In S603, the combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which of the display result 2 specified command and the display result 3 specified command is stored in the display result specific command storage area, the type of jackpot is selected from the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is decided, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and the probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using a data table (table for determining probabilistic jackpot symbol) in which the relationship with odd-numbered doublets such as "7, 7, 7" is set in the middle and right, one of the probabilistic jackpot symbols from the extracted value Select and determine the combination of. When it is determined that the normal jackpot is decided, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle, Using a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) with a relationship with even-numbered doublets such as "4, 4, 4" on the right, a combination of any of the normal jackpot symbols from the extracted values. To select and decide. The symbol determined in this way is used as the final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (S616) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the process of determining the contents of the various effects shown in FIG. 49), the process proceeds to S617. The effect setting process will be described later.

In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table is set according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined by the processing of S616. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the various designated effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is displayed. There are multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation of the symbol, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect, as the symbol variation control pattern. It is stored.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern can be used to display variation of the effect symbol such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, an LED control data, and an end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

After executing the process of S619, the effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) is used according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various LEDs and a speaker 27) as a production component is started (S620). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9 according to the display control execution data. Further, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (S802). The symbol variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect symbol variation start process is completed.

In the character 930 shown in FIG. 17, the microcomputer sets one of a plurality of predetermined speeds (for example, three types of low speed, medium speed, and high speed) so as to throw the color ball 931 at any of the plurality of speeds. You may select it each time. In that case, instead of simply randomly selecting the speed, for example, the ratio of success pattern or failure pattern may be different depending on the selected speed.

Further, a plurality of positions where the character 930 throws may be set. For example, the microcomputer may select each time from a long-distance position that is far from the hold display of the target and a short-distance position that is closer than the long-distance position. In that case, the faster the initial velocity of the color ball 931 at the long-distance position, the more likely it is to become a success pattern, and the slower the initial velocity of the color ball 931 at the short-distance position, the more likely it is to become a success pattern. If the initial speed of the color ball 931 at a long distance position is slow, it takes a long time for the color ball 931 to collide with the target hold display, so the production is delayed, but by increasing the initial speed, the production can be improved. It can be prevented from extending. On the other hand, if the initial velocity of the color ball 931 at a short distance position is fast, the color ball 931 collides with the target hold display TH in a short time, so that the player may not be able to fully enjoy the production, but the initial velocity. By slowing down, it is possible to secure enough time for the player to enjoy the production.

Even when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 at any of a plurality of speeds, it is conceivable that the speed at the time of deceleration at the time of entering the deceleration period is the same. By standardizing the deceleration speed, deceleration control can be simplified as compared with the case where the deceleration speed is selectively set from a plurality of speeds.

In the hold change effect, the deceleration control may not always be accompanied, and the deceleration control may not be accompanied. In this case, if the design is made so that the expectation that a successful result can be obtained is higher with the deceleration control than without it, the player's expectation for the execution of the deceleration control can be increased. Can be done.

The deceleration period of the color ball can be set in various ways. For example, the original speed may be restored before the color ball collides with the hold display TH. Further, even if it is a success pattern, the push button 120 may not vibrate. Further, even if it is a failure pattern, the push button 120 may vibrate, although the ratio is lower than that in the success pattern.

When executing a pattern in which the effect result is a failure, the color ball does not collide with the target hold display TH while the deceleration control is continued, but the speed of the color ball returns to the original speed before the collision. It may be allowed to pass without colliding with the hold display TH and then falling or colliding with the hold display TH.

As an example in which the action display acts on the predetermined display, an example in which the color ball acts is given here. However, instead of such an action display, for example, an action display may be provided by giving an effect such that the periphery of the target hold display TH changes to a color different from the periphery of the other hold display H.

In addition, when deceleration control is performed, an area including a change target (hold display, active display, etc. as a predetermined display) and an action (color ball as an action display) in the background image according to the deceleration timing, The brightness of the screen may be changed in other areas. Specifically, by darkening the background image other than the change target and the action object at the deceleration timing, it is possible to draw attention to a specific effect (hold change effect or active hold change effect described later). On the contrary, it may be highlighted by brightening the change target and the action object, or by adding a predetermined effect image to the change target and the action object. It should be noted that the brightness setting and the like may be executed only on one of the change target and the action object.

The hold change effect shown in FIG. 17 is an effect related to the change of the hold display H. However, such an effect may be diverted to an active hold change effect related to a change in the active display. Specifically, referring to FIG. 17, the character 930 does not throw the ball toward the hold display H, but throws the ball toward the active display AH. The content of the production is changed into a success pattern and a failure pattern according to the one described with reference to FIG. Further, the control may be performed using the tables shown in FIGS. 18 to 20.

Deceleration control may be performed in addition to the hold change effect and the active hold change effect. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed in the center of the screen during fluctuation, and deceleration control may be performed when the action display acts on the predetermined image. The predetermined image is an image that is not related to the hold display H or the active display AH. Then, a pattern that succeeds and a pattern that fails may be provided by the action display acting on a predetermined image. In a successful pattern, the action display may act on a predetermined image to complete the operation promotion display that prompts the operation of the operation means such as the push button 120. Such an effect may be performed in a normal gaming state, or may be performed in a high probability or in a short time. More specifically, if the image of the hand is displayed in the center of the screen during a high probability, the image indicating the button flies there, the deceleration control is started before hitting, and the image of the hand catches the button image. , It develops into the production of the operation promotion display for prompting the button operation, and if the image of the hand cannot catch the image of the button, the production may be completed. Then, by operating the push button during the execution of the operation promotion display effect, the effect of displaying an image indicating that a big hit or a loss has occurred may be executed.

The hold display may be represented by something other than an image. For example, the hold display H may be indicated by lighting an LED or the like. Then, the deceleration control of the image shown as the action display may be performed in front of the LED corresponding to the hold display TH. In the failure pattern, the LED lighting color may not be changed, and in the success pattern, the LED lighting color may be changed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an active hold change effect. The active hold change effect is an example of a specific effect related to the active display. In addition, the active hold change effect is positioned as one of the effects for announcing the operation related to the ongoing change display by changing the mode of the active display.

The active hold change effect introduced here is an effect that shows whether or not the color of the active display changes when the color ball thrown toward the active display collides with the active display and breaks. The setting here is that the color ball always hits the target hold display, and the player is entertained with the effect of whether or not the ball breaks. If the ball breaks and the color of the active display changes, the production result is successful, and if the ball does not break and the color of the active display does not change, it fails. When it succeeds, it is more likely that the result of the in-progress variable display will be a big hit than when it fails, and the expectation also depends on the changing color (see FIG. 26).

For example, its color variations are blue, green, and red. Such a difference in color represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display in progress will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest expectation of a big hit, followed by green and blue. Except for the fact that the target is an active display and that there is no deceleration period, the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 has the same effect content as the hold change effect described with reference to FIG.

In particular, the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 is significantly different from the hold change effect shown in FIG. 17 in that the success rate is a success pattern (the color of the active display changes) depending on the position of the character 930 throwing the color ball 931. The point is that the rate of becoming the color (red) with the highest expectation of big hit in the success pattern is different. The type of character 930 is the same regardless of the difference in its position. In this way, since the character 930 is common, it is possible to make the player feel that the character 930 has moved to the place when the position is changed. However, different characters may be displayed depending on the position.

Hereinafter, the effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. On the screen of the effect display device 9, the active display area AHA, the active display AH, and the hold display H are displayed during the variable display of the effect symbol indicated by the three downward arrows.

With reference to FIG. 24 (a), the character 930 carrying the color ball 931 appears at the position A during the variable display of the effect symbol. When the character 930 appears, the screen displays that the push button operation is effective (not shown). At this time, if the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position A to the position B, and if the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position B to the position C, and then the push button. When the 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position C to the position A. In this way, the position of the character 930 repeatedly changes in the order of A → B → C → A → B ... In response to the operation of the push button 120. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of changing the start position of the effect. Position A is the closest and position C is the farthest from the active display AH. FIG. 24B shows a state in which the position C is selected as the position of the character 930. The valid period of the operation is predetermined, and the valid period of the operation may be counted down on the screen.

FIG. 24 (c) shows that the character 930 is throwing the color ball 931 from the position A closest to the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually hits the active display AH. Subsequently, FIG. 24D shows how the color ball 931 was brilliantly cracked and the color of the active display AH changed.

On the other hand, FIG. 24E shows that the character 930 is throwing the color ball 931 from the position C farthest from the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually hits the active display AH. Subsequently, FIG. 24 (f) shows how the color ball 931 bounces off without breaking. Therefore, at this time, the color of the active display AH does not change.

In this active hold change effect, the closer the position where the character 930 throws the ball is to the active display AH, the higher the rate at which the effect becomes a success pattern, and therefore the higher the rate at which the color of the active display AH is raised. Therefore, from that point of view alone, the player desires to operate the push button 120 to set the position of the character 930 to the position A. However, in this active hold change effect, the closer the position where the character 930 throws the ball is to the active display AH, the more the color of the active display AH rises only in red, which has the lowest expectation of a big hit, among the three types of colors. Is high.

In other words, if the active display is a big hit, the color of the active display AH should be set to red, which has the highest expectation of a big hit in the success pattern, but the position of the character 930 at that time is at position A. If it is set, the success pattern is selected at a high rate, but the rising color at that time is set to blue, which has the lowest expectation, instead of red. In other words, at position A, although it is easy to see the rising effect, the rising color indicated by the effect does not reach the color corresponding to the original jackpot expectation, and the stage is higher than that in terms of the jackpot expectation. It means that you are more likely to be limited to lower colors. In this case, the player has to feel uneasy that the original rising color according to the jackpot expectation may be a higher-grade color.

On the other hand, the farther the position where the character 930 throws the ball is from the active display AH, the lower the rate at which the effect becomes a success pattern, so the chances of seeing the upstart effect decrease, but fortunately, the success pattern. When you can see, it is highly possible that the rising color at that time is the color corresponding to the original jackpot expectation. For example, if the effect is executed at the most street position C from the active display AH when the jackpot is determined, the success pattern is unlikely to occur, but if the success pattern occurs, the color at that time shows the actual expectation. It will be shown. As a result, the player can infer the original jackpot expectation from the raised color.

As described above, in this active hold change effect, the ratio of the success pattern and the degree of color restriction that occurs when the success pattern is reached differ depending on the position where the effect is started. In order to realize such an effect, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rising color of the active display AH at the time of the success pattern is determined in two stages.

As a first step, the rising color is determined from the viewpoint of whether or not the active display is a big hit without considering the position of the character 930. The color determined at this time is referred to as "final color". Since the final color is a color determined from the viewpoint of whether or not the active display is a big hit, the color faithfully reflects the expectation that the active display will be a big hit. However, whether the determined "final color" is actually used for the production or a color with a lower expectation of a big hit is used for the production is determined by the determination in the next second stage.

As the second step, the "final color" determined in the first step is actually used for the production in consideration of the pitching position of the character, or by limiting it, the index showing the jackpot expectation is "final". Color "Determine whether to use the following colors. For example, even if the "final color" is red, if restrictions are applied, the color adopted as the actual rising color is blue. The details of these first-stage and second-stage decisions will be further clarified by the description of FIGS. 26-29 and 31.

In this active hold change effect, since the expectation of the success pattern is higher at a position closer to the active display AH, it is possible to provide an effect that matches the player's assumption that the position closer to the active display AH is likely to change. In this active hold change effect, the deceleration control effect described with reference to FIG. 17 may be added, and as a failure pattern, an effect that the thrown ball does not hit the active display also occurs. It may be set so that it can be done.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an active hold change effect execution decision table. The active hold change effect execution decision table is used to determine whether or not to execute the active hold change effect. Whether or not to execute the active hold change effect is sorted by the random number SR5 and drawn. As shown in the figure, the distribution mode is set so that the ratio of with and without effect is 2: 3. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an active hold final color determination table. The active hold final color determination table is used to determine the type of color (starting color) when changing the color of the active display in the active hold change effect. As already explained, the rising color actually used for the production may be different from the "final color" determined here. In particular, FIG. 26A shows a big hit active hold final color determination table, and FIG. 18B shows an off-off active hold final color determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

The active hold final color determination table at the time of a big hit is a table used when the active display, which is the target of the active hold change effect, is a big hit. The active hold final color determination table at the time of loss is a table used when the active display, which is the target of the active hold change effect, is off. In each table, the "final color" is sorted by the random number SR5 and drawn. As shown in the figure, when there is no change, the selection rate is higher when there is no change than when there is a big hit, and for blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation is higher in that order. It is said to be such an aspect. The "final color" is, so to speak, a tentatively determined rising color that is selected based on the active hold final color determination table regardless of the position of the character to be pitched.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. The effect setting process is a subroutine executed in S616 of FIG. 23. First, it is determined whether or not the change effect restriction flag is set (S901). When the change effect restriction flag is set, the process ends so that the effect is not executed twice. On the other hand, when the change effect restriction flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the variation executed this time is reach (S902), the process ends when it is not reach, and when it is reach, the active hold change effect execution decision is made. The table determines whether or not the active hold change effect is executed (S903). The active hold change effect execution decision table is as shown in FIG.

In S904, when it is determined that the active hold change effect is executed, it is determined whether the variable display being executed this time is a big hit, that is, whether the active display corresponds to the big hit (S905). In the case of a big hit, the final color of the active hold is determined by the big hit active hold final color determination table (S906), and in the case of a loss other than the big hit, the active hold final color determination table is active hold. The final color of is determined (S908). The active hold final color determination table at the time of big hit and the active hold final color determination table at the time of loss are as shown in FIG. By these determination processes, the rising color when the active hold change effect is successful is tentatively determined.

After S906 or S908, the determined content is stored in the storage area (S907) and the process ends.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the effect symbol. The processing during the change of the effect symbol is a subroutine executed in S802 of FIG. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (S841) and subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer value (S842). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

If the process timer has not timed out (S843; N), the process proceeds to S849. When the process timer times out in S843 (S843; Y), the process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (S845). Further, it is determined whether or not the lower plate error notification flag indicating that the lower plate error is being notified, which will be described later, is set (S846).

When the lower plate error notification flag is not set (S846; N), the effect device (S446; N) is based on the process data such as the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, and the sound number data set next. If the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (S847), such as changing the control state for the effect component), and the lower plate error notification flag is set (S846; Y), then Of the set display control execution data, LED control execution data, and process data such as sound number data, the effect device (for production) excluding the frame LED 28 based on the process data such as display control execution data and sound number data. The effect device is controlled according to the contents of the following process data, such as changing the control state for the component) (S848).

Further, in S849, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the lower plate error notification flag is set.
When the lower plate error notification flag is not set (S849; N), the effect device (for effect) is based on process data such as display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound number data corresponding to the process timer. When the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (S850), such as changing the control state for the component), and the lower plate error notification flag is set (S849; Y), the process timer is supported. Of the process data such as display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound number data, the effect device (effect component) excluding the frame LED 28 based on the process data such as display control execution data and sound number data. The effect device is controlled according to the contents of the following process data, such as changing the control state (S851).

After the execution of S847, S848, S850, and S851, the operation effect processing is performed according to the operation of the push button 120 (S852). The details of the operation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out based on the value of the fluctuation time timer (S853). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in S853), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) (S855). On the other hand, when the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in S853), it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S854). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S854), the processing during effect symbol change ends. On the other hand, when the confirmation command reception flag is set (Y in S854), the process proceeds to S855. In this way, even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in S853), the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received, so that it is long due to noise between the boards, for example. Even when a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation time is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol can be ended when the normal fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the relationship between the start position of the effect and the success rate and the change rate. The illustrated correspondence data is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. As explained together with the explanation of the active hold change effect using FIG. 24, in the active hold change effect, the rate of success pattern and the color that is formed when the success pattern is reached, depending on the position where the effect is started. The degree of restriction is different. The positions A, B, and C shown in FIG. 29 correspond to the positions of the screen shown in FIG. 24.

When the character throws a color ball at the position A closest to the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect starts at the position A, the rate at which the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern (success rate, expectation) is 100. %. That is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position A closest to the active display among the positions, the player can always see the effect of the success pattern. However, at that time, only 20% of the colors of the active display are determined to be the "final color" tentatively determined according to the display result of the variable display, and the rate of expectation of a big hit is 80%. The lowest first color, that is, blue, is determined.

When the character throws a color ball at the position C farthest from the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect starts at the position C, the rate (success rate) at which the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern is only 20%. Absent. That is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position C farthest from the active display among the positions, the player sees the effect of the success pattern as compared with the case where the effect is started at the other positions. It is less likely to be possible. However, the ratio of the rising color of the active display to the "final color" tentatively determined according to the display result of the variable display is 100%, and if a success pattern can be seen, The player can have confidence in the jackpot expectation indicated by the rising color at that time.

Therefore, from the viewpoint of whether the player wants to see the success pattern as much as possible or to increase the reliability of the rising color indicated by the success pattern, the player can operate the position to start the active hold change effect by himself / herself. You can choose. Therefore, the player's intention can be reflected in the production, and a more interesting player participation type production can be provided.

The success rate and the color change rate shown in FIG. 29 can be variously adjusted within a range in which the above-mentioned effects can be exhibited. For example, at position A, the final color may not change and only changes to the first stage color, and at position C, it changes to the first stage color at a very small rate. It may be possible to do so. Further, when the color is changed at the position C, the color may be changed to a special mode (special color) that can be seen only at the position C. The special mode is, for example, a mode in which the active display is displayed in a color that changes to rainbow when the jackpot is determined.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the operation effect processing. The operation effect process is a subroutine executed in S846 of FIG. 28. First, it is determined whether or not to execute the active hold change effect (S860). If the active hold change effect is not executed, the process ends, but if it is executed, it is determined whether or not the push button 120 is in the operation valid period (S861). If the operation of the push button 120 is not valid, the process proceeds to S865. During the operation valid period of the push button 120, it is determined whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected (S862). If no operation is detected, the process proceeds to S864, but if an operation is detected, the start position of the active hold change effect is changed according to the button operation (S863). Specifically, each time an operation is detected, the position of the character 930 shown in FIG. 24 is changed to positions A → B → C → A → B ....

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the operation valid period (S864), and if it is not the end, the process ends once, but if it is the end, the start position of the currently selected effect is selected. Therefore, the content of the active hold change effect is determined according to the “relationship between the start position of the effect and the success rate and the change rate” shown in FIG. 29 (S865). As a result, in this step, whether the effect pattern is a success pattern in which the color rise of the active display occurs, a failure pattern in which the color rise of the active display does not occur, and when it is a success pattern, the rise It is determined whether the color is the "final color" tentatively determined in S906 or S908 of FIG. 27, or the one-step color (red). Next, the determined content is saved in the storage area (S866), and the process ends.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the active hold change effect. It is conceivable to add the effect pattern of the modification 1 described below to the pattern of the active hold change effect already described. Modification 1 is an example in which the battle effect starts after the failure pattern of the active hold change effect, and the color of the active display suddenly rises without the action effect of the ball or the like before the result of the battle effect is obtained. .. The battle production is a production that indicates whether or not the variable display this time becomes a big hit depending on the result of the victory or defeat. Since the color of the active display is raised before the result of the battle effect is obtained, the color that is created is a warning of the result of the battle effect.

Modification 1 proceeds in the same manner as the failure pattern of the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c)). In particular, in the example of FIG. 41, an example in which the effect is started from the position C farthest from the active display is shown. As described above, when the effect is started from the position C farthest from the active display, the failure pattern is selected at a high rate (see FIG. 29). For this reason, the player who dares to select the position C as the start position of the production may not be able to see the success pattern and may be disappointed.

However, by allowing the pattern as in the first modification to occur, it is possible to draw the once disappointed player into the fun of the continuous production again. That is, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when a reach occurs on the screen after the failure pattern is displayed (FIG. 41 (d)), the battle effect between the enemy and the ally starts on the screen. The player waits for the result, but in the middle of the battle production, the color of the active display suddenly rises without any warning (Fig. 41 (e)). It is desirable that the rising color at this time is the "final color" described with reference to FIG. 26 and the like. By doing so, the player can infer the possibility of a big hit with the original rising color that reflects the expectation of a big hit.

Alternatively, in such a pattern of the modified example 1, the jackpot expectation is higher than the "final color" rather than the "final color" that is desirable for the player because the pattern has passed the failure pattern (FIG. 41 (c)). It is also possible that the index of is only raised to a low color.

Alternatively, such a pattern of the modified example 1 may be performed only when the display result is a big hit. In that case, the rising color may be a special color (for example, a rainbow color) indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed.

By adding such a modification 1, the range of production can be expanded. In particular, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the failure pattern occurs. The pattern of the modification 1 may be controlled to be selected by further random number lottery when the failure pattern is selected according to the success rate shown in FIG. 29. Further, here, it has been explained that the color of the active display is raised without any warning after the battle production, but the production that is a sign of this may be added first.

Next, a modification 2 of the active hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 49. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a modification 2 of the active hold change effect. It is conceivable to add the effect pattern of the modification 2 described below to the pattern of the active hold change effect already described, or to the pattern to which the modification 1 is added. Of course, as the active hold change effect, a pachinko gaming machine that executes only the modification 2 may be used.

In the second modification, the color of the ball changes sequentially while the character repeatedly transfers the ball between the right hand and the left hand within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and a certain time elapses. When the ball is thrown toward the active display, the color of the active display changes to the color of the ball. Hereinafter, the active hold change effect related to the modification 2 will be referred to as a “timer change effect”.

FIG. 42A is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the effect display device 9 when the timer change effect according to the modification 2 is executed. Further, FIGS. 42 (b) to 42 (f) show an enlarged display image related to the timer change effect among various images displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In FIG. 42, the suggestion display 910 comprises a character image and a ball image 911. The suggestion display 910 is an image suggesting that the active display AH in the active display area AHA changes. Further, the timer display 920 is an image showing the execution time of the timer change effect. When the value of the timer display 920 becomes a value indicating 0 seconds, the character throws the ball image 911, the ball image 911 acts on the active display AH, and an effect of changing the display mode of the active display AH is executed.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), during the variable display, the timer change effect is executed in the upper right display area of the effect display device 9. During the timer change effect, the suggestion display 910 in which the character plays a beanbag and the timer display 920 displayed at the lower part of the suggestion display 910 are superimposed and displayed on the display area of the effect display device 9. The suggestion display 910 and the timer display 920 are images superimposed and displayed in the upper right display area of the effect display device 9. Since the area required for display of such an image does not become too large, it is possible to prevent various effects performed in the variable display from being hindered.

Further, the timer display 920 indicates the execution period of the timer change effect. Specifically, the timer display 920 updates the timed value that is counted down from the initial value of the timed value set at a predetermined timing, and finally the value of the timer display is 0 (indicating 0 seconds). Value). Based on the value of the timer display becoming 0, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed in relation to the timer change effect in which the predetermined display mode is executed. The timer change effect is an effect until the value of the timer display 920 becomes 0 in this way and the display mode of the predetermined display changes. The digital display of such a timer display 920 counts down with time. Here, the timer display 920 actually counts down the two digits below the second, but it is not disclosed in detail in the drawing. Further, it is possible to count down only the number of seconds such as "10", "9" ... "0" without displaying the two digits after the second.

As shown in FIG. 42B, at the start of the timer change effect, the character and the ball image 911 are displayed as the suggestion display 910 suggesting that the display mode of the active display AH changes. The color of the ball image 911 at the start of the timer change effect is blue. Such blue color is the same as the color of the hold display H shown in the hold display area 18c. The hold display H is displayed in blue. Further, the active display AH is usually displayed in blue, and the color may change due to the timer change effect. As for the colors of the active display AH, the jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. The character throws the ball image 911 upward like a beanbag. "10:00" is displayed on the timer display 920, indicating that the timer change effect is executed for 10 seconds.

After 3 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 42 (b), as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the timer display 920 is displayed at "07: 00" indicating that the remaining time of the timer change effect is 7 seconds. .. At this time, the color of the ball image 911 changes from blue to green (diagonal lines in the figure). By changing the color, the expectation of a big hit is improved. After that, 9 seconds after the start of the timer change effect, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the timer display 920 is displayed at "01:00" indicating that the remaining time of the timer change effect is 1 second. To. The color of the ball image 911 is the same green as in the state of FIG. 42 (c).

After another 1 second has elapsed from the state of FIG. 42 (d) (10 seconds after the timer change effect), the timer display 920 is set to "00:00" and the remaining time of the timer change effect is as shown in FIG. It is shown to be 0 seconds. Then, when the time reaches 0 seconds, the effect that the character displayed as the suggestion display throws the ball image 911 toward the active display area AHA is executed. The thrown ball image 911 hits the active display AH, as shown in FIG. 42 (f). The display mode of the active display AH changes from blue to green in a mode related to the timer change effect when the ball image 911 hits. The change from blue to green improves the expectation of the variable display being executed.

In this way, during the execution of the timer change effect, the timer display 920 can inform the execution period of the timer change effect. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 42 (e) and 42 (f), the display mode of the active display AH. Can be clarified when it changes. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the display value of the timer display 920 during the period until the timer display 920 becomes 0 seconds, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (c), the jackpot expectation is improved by changing the color of the ball image 911 in the suggestion display 910 during the execution of the timer change effect, so that the ball image in the suggestion display 910 is improved. The player can be noticed by the display mode of 911.

FIG. 43 is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of the timer change effect. The horizontal axis of the timing chart indicates the time (t), the low level indicates that the fluctuation has stopped, and the high level indicates that the fluctuation is in progress. In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach shown in FIG. 6, the timer change effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. As the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the fluctuation patterns of the first to fourth super reach are provided. When the variation pattern command for specifying the variation pattern of the super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect of the designated super reach based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reach of FIG. 6, one of a plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter, also simply referred to as SP reach) is executed for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the SP reach, any one of the effect symbols being displayed in the variable display is the reach. After that, it develops into SP reach after a predetermined time elapses from the reach state (after normal reach or after a reach effect different from normal reach). The SP reach executed in the super reach is a reach with a high degree of expectation that a big hit display result is obtained as compared with the normal reach that does not develop to the SP reach and does not produce a flashy effect after the reach. During the SP reach, for example, an effect such as a battle effect is executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect in which the jackpot display result is displayed when the ally character and the enemy character fight and the ally character wins, and the off display result is displayed when the ally character is defeated.

The timer change effect is executed in the period until such SP reach is executed. In this way, the player can pay attention to the timer change effect before the SP reach. In addition, the SP reach production, which is highly expected to be a big hit, can be attracted to the player without hindering the production by the SP reach.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timer change effect execution determination table. The timer change effect execution decision table is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the timer change effect. The timer change effect execution decision table includes the big hit timer change effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 44 (A) and the missed timer change effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 44 (B). These timer change effect execution determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

In the jackpot timer change effect execution decision table of FIG. 44 (A), the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "execute timer change effect> do not execute timer change effect" depending on the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. As described above, the data is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the timer change effect is selected is higher. In the out-of-time timer change effect execution decision table of FIG. 44 (B), the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "execute timer change effect <do not execute timer change effect" depending on the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. As described above, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the decision not to execute the timer change effect is higher.

Due to the data settings in FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B), when the display result of the variation display, which is the target of the timer change effect, becomes the jackpot display result, the timer change effect is executed as compared with the case where the display result is off. The rate of being done increases. Therefore, when the timer change effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the timer change effect is not executed.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timer change effect execution time determination table. The timer change effect execution time determination table is a data table used for lottery to determine the execution time (seconds) of the timer change effect for each change. The timer change effect execution time determination table includes the jackpot timer change effect execution time determination table shown in FIG. 45 (A) and the missed timer change effect execution time determination table shown in FIG. 45 (B). These timer change effect execution time determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

In the jackpot timer change effect execution time determination table of FIG. 45 (A), the selection ratio of the timer change effect execution time is "10 seconds <15 seconds <20 seconds" according to the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio of selecting the long timer change effect execution time (long number of seconds) is higher. In the timer change effect execution time determination table at the time of disconnection in FIG. 45 (B), the selection ratio of the timer change effect execution time is "10 seconds> 15 seconds> 20 seconds" depending on the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio at which the short timer change effect execution time (short number of seconds) is selected is higher.

Due to the data settings in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B), when the display result of the variation display, which is the target of the timer change effect, becomes the jackpot display result, the timer change effect is longer than that when the display result is off. The percentage determined by the execution time is high. Therefore, when the execution time of the timer change effect is long, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the execution time of the timer change effect is short. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which display mode of the timer display 920 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of execution times for the timer change effect are provided. Therefore, since there are a plurality of display modes that are initially displayed as the timer display 920, the effects of the timer display 920 are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a change number determination table for timer change effect. In the change number determination table, the number of color changes of the ball image 911 is determined in the timer change effect. The change number determination table includes the jackpot change number determination table shown in FIG. 46 (A) and the out-of-change number change determination table shown in FIG. 46 (B). These change number determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the number of times the color of the ball image 911 changes.

The timer change effect execution time (seconds) in the change number determination table indicates the execution time of the timer change effect. In this embodiment, the number of changes is set by two patterns every 10 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds. When the execution time of the timer change effect is 10 seconds, the number of changes is determined to be either 0 or 1. When the number of changes is 0, it means that the color of the ball image 911 does not change from blue in the timer change effect. Further, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 15 seconds, the number of changes is determined to be either once or twice. Further, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 20 seconds, the number of changes is determined to be either 2 times or 3 times.

In the jackpot change number determination table of FIG. 46 (A), the selection ratio is "0 times <1 time" according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing for the variation display in which the timer change effect execution time is 10 seconds. The data is set so that the rate at which a large number of changes is selected is higher so that there is a magnitude relationship. In addition, for the variable display with the timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "1 time <2 times" according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio of the data is higher. In addition, for the variable display with the timer change effect execution time of 20 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "2 times <3 times" according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio of the data is higher.

Further, in the table for determining the number of changes at the time of deviation in FIG. 46 (B), for the variation display in which the timer change effect execution time is 10 seconds, the selection ratio is "0 times> 1 time" according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which a small number of changes is selected is higher so that there is a magnitude relationship. In addition, for the variable display with the timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a small number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "1 time> 2 times" according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the ratio of the data is higher. Further, for the variable display in which the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds, the data is set so that the time is always determined twice by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. In this way, at the time of disconnection, the ball image 911 does not change three times as a change pattern, so it is confirmed that a big hit is achieved by changing the ball image 911 three times.

By setting the data in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), when the display result of the variation display, which is the target of the timer change effect, becomes the jackpot display result, which timer change effect is executed as compared with the case where the off display result is obtained. The ratio of time determined by the number of changes is higher. Therefore, when the number of changes of the ball image 911 is large in the timer change effect, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the number of changes is small.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for timer change effect. In the change pattern determination table, the color change pattern of the ball image 911 in the timer change effect is determined. The change pattern determination table includes the jackpot change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) and the out-of-order change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (B). These change pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. Here, in the table shown in FIG. 47, the higher the color change, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. The rainbow color is a color that is determined only when a big hit occurs.

In the jackpot change pattern determination table of FIG. 47 (A), when the number of changes is one, the selection ratio is "" blue → yellow change pattern "<" blue, "depending on the SR5 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to green is selected is higher so that there is a magnitude relationship of "→ green change pattern". When the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is "" blue-> yellow-> green change pattern "<" blue-> green-> red change pattern "" depending on the SR5 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to red so as to have a magnitude relationship is selected is higher. In addition, when the number of changes is 3, the selection ratio is "" Blue-> Yellow-> Green-> Red change pattern "<" Blue-> Green-> Red-> Rainbow change, depending on the SR5 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to rainbow color is selected so as to have a magnitude relationship of "pattern" is higher.

In the out-of-order change pattern determination table of FIG. 47 (B), when the number of changes is one, the selection ratio is "" blue → yellow change pattern ">" blue The data is set so that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to yellow is selected so that there is a magnitude relationship of "→ green change pattern". When the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is "" blue-> yellow-> green change pattern ">" blue-> green-> red change pattern "" depending on the SR5 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the change pattern that finally turns green so as to have a magnitude relationship is selected is higher. Further, in the case of disconnection, the change pattern that changes three times is not provided.

Due to the data settings in FIGS. 47 (A) and 47 (B), when the display result of the variation display, which is the target of the timer change effect, becomes the jackpot display result, it finally changes as compared with the case where the display result is off. The proportion of the color of the ball image 911 becoming a color with a high expectation of a big hit increases. Therefore, the final change in the color type of the ball image 911 can increase the player's expectation for a big hit.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a change timing determination table. In the change timing determination table, the change timing of the ball image 911 is determined according to the number of changes. FIG. 48 In the change timing determination table, when the timer change effect execution time is 10 seconds and the number of changes is 1, the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) is determined by the SR6 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that "7:00" and "2:00" are determined at a ratio of 1: 1. When the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is one, the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) is set to "10:00" according to the SR6 value extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that "" and "5:00" are determined at a ratio of 1: 1.

Further, when the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is 2, the first time is set as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of "10:00", the second time is "5:00", the timing of the first time is "13:00", and the timing of the second time is "7:00" are determined at a ratio of 1: 1. It is set. Further, when the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is 2, the first time is set as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of "15:00", the second time is "10:00", the timing of the first time is "13:00", and the timing of the second time is "7:00" are determined at a ratio of 1: 1. It is set.

When the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is 3, the first time is set as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The timing of "15:00", the second time is "10:00", the third time is "5:00", the first time is "13:00", the second time is "7:00", and the third time is "2:00". The data is set so that the timing of "" is determined at a ratio of 1: 1.

When the actual time of the timer change effect and the number of changes are determined by the setting of the data in FIG. 48, it is possible to determine one of the plurality of change timings. Further, since a plurality of change timings are provided in this way, it is possible to draw attention to the player at which timing the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 changes.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process (S616) in the effect symbol change start process for the timer change effect. In FIG. 49, among the processes related to the setting of various effects included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol change start process, the process related to the setting of the timer change effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines various effects to be executed by the timer change effect by performing the following processes.

First, it is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received at the time of this fluctuation whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed this time is a fluctuation pattern that specifies super reach (S931). The received variation pattern command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not the super reach variation pattern is obtained depending on whether or not the super reach variation pattern command is stored in the area indicating the variation display executed this time. judge. If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the process proceeds to S938. If it is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the extracted random value and the timer change effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 44 are used to determine whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display this time is a big hit (missing). Whether or not to execute the timer change effect is determined by (S932). Whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit is determined by the display result command or the like received when the current variation display is executed to determine whether or not the display result of the variation display executed this time is a big hit. ..

In S933, it is determined whether or not the timer change effect is determined to be executed based on the determination result of S933 (S933). If it is not decided to execute the timer change effect, the process proceeds to S938. If it is determined to execute the timer change effect, the value of SR3 is extracted in S934, and the timer change effect execution time (timer change effect) is extracted from the extracted random number value and the timer change effect execution time determination table shown in FIG. The number of seconds to execute) is determined. Next, in S935, the value of SR4 is extracted, and the number of times the color of the ball image 911 is changed (number of changes) during the timer change effect is determined by the extracted random number value and the change number determination table shown in FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S936, SR5 is extracted, and the ball image is determined by whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit (or miss) by the extracted random number value and the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47. The color change pattern of 911 is determined (S936). Next, the value of SR6 is extracted in S937, and the change timing when the color of the ball image 911 changes in the timer change effect is determined by the extracted random value and the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 48 (S937). Since the color of the ball image 911 changes when the timer display 920 reaches a specific display value, the change timing also determines the timer display value at the time of change.

Next, in S938, in addition to the timer change effect, other effects to be executed during the current variation display are determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed. In the effect setting process, data for executing the determined effect is stored in the RAM 103. The effect set in the effect setting process is selected as the effect control pattern, and is executed during the effect display during the effect symbol change process in S802 based on the effect control pattern.

The timer change effect may be executed for the hold display H on which the hold change effect is executed. For example, in the hold change effect, the color of the hold display H is changed from blue in the normal mode to yellow. Then, when the changed hold display H is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA, the color of the active display AH may be further changed by the timer change effect.

In such a case, when the start winning prize occurs, the final color of the predetermined color is first determined depending on whether or not it is a big hit, and in the hold change effect, the color of the hold display H is changed halfway. In the timer change effect, the color of the active display AH may be controlled to change to the final color. Further, the effect executed by the look-ahead effect may be an effect that is completely unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, or may be an effect suggesting that the effect using the timer display 920 is executed. For example, as an effect completely unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, a predetermined character is made to appear, and the character performs a predetermined action such as hitting the hold display H on which the hold change is executed. , It is conceivable that the color of the hold display H changes. Further, as an effect suggesting that the effect using the timer display 920 is executed, the display mode of the hold display H is changed to the preparation hold described as "timer is being prepared", and the variable display for the changed hold is changed. When is executed, the timer change effect may be executed so that the timer display 920 is displayed. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the timer change effect being executed from the stage of the hold display H. It should be noted that the preparation hold is not always executed at the start of fluctuation, and may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the preparation hold, the timer display 920 may be displayed (the timer is displayed but the countdown is not performed, etc.) or may not be displayed.

As an effect of changing the active display AH, an active change effect different from the timer change effect may be executed. As the active change effect, for example, the display mode (for example, color) of the active display AH may be changed by an action effect in which the character emits a beam to the active display AH. Such an active change effect may be executed at any timing before the SP reach and during the SP reach. In such a case, the effect period may be different between the active change effect before the SP reach and the active change effect during the SP reach. For example, the effect period of the active change effect may be long before the SP reach, and the effect period of the active change effect may be short during the SP reach. By doing so, since the active change effect is executed in a short time during the SP reach effect, the execution of the SP reach effect is not hindered by the active change effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the SP reach effect from being impaired, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the active change effect during SP reach may be executed until the final hit / fail effect of the change display (for example, a cut-in effect at the end of the reach that shows whether or not it is a big hit). desirable.

In addition, regarding the active change production during SP reach, instead of shortening the production period, the display of the active change production is reduced, and the production itself of the active change production itself is made more modest than before the SP reach. Good. For example, before the SP reach, a flashy effect is executed on the screen of the effect display device 9 or an accessory is operated, but during the SP reach, if a simpler effect is executed than before the SP reach. Good.

Further, the active change effect and the timer change effect may be executable. In such a case, when the timer change effect is executed, the execution of the active change effect may be prohibited. On the contrary, when the active change effect is executed, the execution of the timer change effect may be prohibited. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and the player from being unable to determine which production to pay attention to. As long as the active change effect and the timer change effect do not overlap, the two effects may be executed during one variation display.

A timer change effect may be executed during the SP reach effect. In such a case, the execution time of the timer change effect may be different between before the start of the SP reach and during the SP reach. For example, the execution period of the timer change effect during SP reach may be shorter than the execution period before SP reach. By doing so, since the timer change effect is executed in a short time during the SP reach effect, the execution of the SP reach effect is not hindered by the timer change effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the SP reach effect from being impaired, and to improve the interest of the game.

The timer change effect may be executed before the reach, and the timer change effect may not be executed after the reach. In this way, the player can concentrate on the post-reach production.

The timer change effect may be executed a plurality of times. For example, the color of the active display AH may be changed when the first timer change effect is executed, and the suggestion display 910 and the timer display 920 may be temporarily erased. Then, the timer change effect is executed again after that, and the color of the active display AH may be changed by the timer change effect.

As shown in FIG. 46, the longer the execution time of the timer change effect, the higher the rate at which the number of changes is determined. Then, when the execution time of the timer change effect is short, there is a case where the timer does not change (the number of changes is 0). However, the active display AH may be changed whenever the timer change effect is executed. Further, even if the execution time of the timer change effect is determined to be a long time, it may be provided that the number of changes is small or does not change.

As shown in FIG. 47, when the number of changes was one, the pattern of changing to red, which has a high expectation of big hit, was not provided. However, when the number of changes is small, a pattern with a high expectation of big hit may be provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), a pattern that changes three times is not provided in the case of deviation, but a pattern that changes three times may be provided even when the display result is deviation.

The change timing determination table as shown in FIG. 48 may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. For example, the change timing may be different depending on whether the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result or the off-display result. In addition, a change timing (for example, a change at the remaining "7:77") that is determined only when the jackpot display result is obtained may be provided.

The case where the timer change effect is executed in any of the first to fourth super reach shown in FIG. 6 is shown. However, the timer change effect may be executed only for a specific super reach. For example, the timer change effect may be executed only for the fourth super reach, which has a high expectation of a big hit.

The timer display 920 that counts down the digital display with time has been described. However, the timer display 920 may count up the numbers with time, and the effect may be executed when the predetermined time is reached. Also, instead of displaying numbers as a period display showing the passage of time, an hourglass image showing the passage of time (indicating time by the amount of sand remaining in the hourglass) or a gauge image showing the passage of time is displayed. Any effect may be used as long as the information that can suggest the end timing of a predetermined period is changed with the passage of time, such as the one displayed by using (indicating the time by increasing or decreasing the gauge). ..

The case where the number of seconds at the start of the timer display 920 is different when the timer change effect is executed is shown. However, regarding the different display modes of the timer display 920, the number of seconds displayed is not different, but the size of the timer display 920 is different, the color of the timer display 920 is different, and the shape of the timer display 920 (frame). It may be any one of different shapes, or a combination thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (e) and 42 (f), the case where the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 directly hits the active display AH and the active display AH changes is shown. However, after the ball image 911 thrown from the character is once enlarged and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, an effect that hits (acts) on the active display AH may be executed. Further, when the ball image 911 thrown from the character hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display may be further changed. For example, when the yellow ball image 911 hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display AH may be further changed to red.

As shown in FIG. 45, the data was set so that the longer the execution time of the timer change effect, the higher the expectation of big hit. However, the execution period of the timer change effect may be constant regardless of the jackpot expectation (for example, always 10 seconds). In such a case, the jackpot expectation may be different in parts other than the numbers, such as changing the color of the frame of the timer display 920 according to the jackpot expectation.

A plurality of types of characters shown as the suggestion display 910 in FIG. 42 may be provided. Then, the number of times the ball image changes and the number of seconds of the timer display 920 may differ depending on the character.

The following control may be executed for the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a freeze effect) may be executed in which the countdown of the timer display 920 is stopped for several seconds during the execution of the timer change effect. After the freeze effect, the timer display 920 may be counted down again. Further, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on whether the freeze effect is passed or not.

The following control may be executed for the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, a special pattern may be provided in which the value of the timer display 920 increases when the timer display 920 executed by the timer change effect reaches a value indicating 0 seconds. Moreover, such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times. Further, each time the special pattern is executed, the color of the ball image 911 may be changed by the timer change effect.

The position where the timer change effect is executed may be changed depending on the type of the effect being executed during the variation display. For example, when the first effect is executed, the timer change effect is executed at the upper right position of the effect display device 9, and when the second effect is executed, the lower left of the effect display device 9 is executed. The timer change effect may be executed at the position. Further, the size of the suggestion display 910 displayed as the timer change effect may be changed instead of changing the position where the timer change effect is executed depending on the type of effect.

The display mode of the timer display 920 in the timer change effect may be changed to 0 seconds. For example, the countdown may start from 10 seconds, and the number of the timer display 920 or the color of the frame may be changed at 7 seconds of the change timing. Further, the color at this time may correspond to the changing color of the ball image 911.

As shown in FIG. 42, as a timer change effect, a character plays a beanbag to change one ball image 911. A plurality of such ball images 911 may be displayed instead of one. Further, at least one or more ball images 911 out of the plurality of ball images 911 may be changed during the execution of the timer change effect. For example, when a character plays a beanbag using two ball images 911, one ball image 911 is changed from blue to green and the other ball image 911 is changed from blue to red during the timer change effect. May be good. Then, when the timer display 920 reaches 0 seconds, the character may throw any of these ball images 911 toward the active display AH. By doing so, since it is not known what kind of display mode the active display AH will be displayed in the end, the player can pay attention to the timer change effect. Further, when the big hit expectation is high, the number of ball images 911 displayed in the timer change effect may be increased. Further, after the display mode of the active display AH is changed by the first ball image 911, the character throws the second ball image 911 toward the active display AH again to obtain a display mode with higher expectation. And the active display AH may be changed.

A pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but in the various settings shown in this embodiment, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player by rotating the slot machine ( It is also possible to apply it to slot machines). Specifically, the timer change effect may be executed in a display device such as an effect display device provided in the slot machine. When the timer change effect is executed on the slot machine, the hold display may be displayed when a predetermined lottery target combination is won. Then, in the next game, the hold display is moved to the active display area, and in the game, when an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, an AT that notifies an operation procedure advantageous to the player) is won, a timer is used. All you have to do is execute the change effect. Further, in the timer change effect in such a case, it may be executed together with the delay control that delays the progress of the game. The timer display may be displayed for a predetermined period during the delay control, and the display mode of the active display may be changed based on the timer display becoming 0 seconds.

As described above, in the second modification, the mode of executing the active hold change effect that suggests the timing of changing the display mode of the active display AH and the hold display H by the timer has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the deceleration control may be executed even during the active hold change effect. When the deceleration control is executed during the active hold change effect shown in the modification 2, the update speed of the timer is changed between the execution and non-execution of the deceleration control, that is, the timer during the deceleration control execution. The update speed may be slower than during non-execution of deceleration control. Further, the update speed of the timer may be constant between the execution and non-execution of the deceleration control, that is, the timer may be updated at the same speed regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed or not. When the timer is updated at the same speed regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed, the initial value of the timer is displayed in consideration of the length of the deceleration period, and the timer is displayed according to the progress of the effect. You can update the value of.

Further, in the second modification, a mode in which the timing at which the display mode of the active display AH or the hold display H changes is suggested by the remaining time displayed on the timer is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the display modes of the active display AH and the hold display H change may be suggested by a mode other than the remaining time, such as the amount of sand remaining in the fuse of the bomb or the hourglass.

In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24, the player can select the effect start position from the predetermined positions A to C. However, the position may be freely selected by the player by operating the operating means.

The active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 is an effect related to a change in the active display. However, such an effect may be diverted to a hold change effect related to a change in the hold display. Specifically, referring to FIG. 24, the character 930 does not throw the ball toward the active display AH, but throws the ball toward any of the hold display H. It is arbitrary which hold display H is targeted and at what timing the effect is started, but for example, the effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 21) used for controlling the hold change effect is used to determine them. May be good. However, the distance from the positions A to C differs depending on the location of the hold display H. In order to make the distance relationship between the hold display and the positions A to C common regardless of which of the hold display H is targeted, the positions A to A to the position A to the position A to the target hold display H The position of C may be shifted.

In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24, when the success pattern is reached, the color of the active display becomes the "final color", or the color of the first stage (blue), which is the lowest among the colors whose jackpot expectation increases. ). However, instead of such a color of the first step, the color of the second step may be raised (green), or the color of either the first step or the second step may be raised. However, when the "final color" is originally determined to be the color of the first stage, it is necessary to regulate so that the color does not become the color of the second stage.

The timer change effect shown in FIG. 42 is a modification 2 of the active hold change effect. However, such an effect may be diverted to a hold change effect related to a change in the hold display. Specifically, the timer change effect using the timer display 920 of FIG. 42 may be executed for the hold display H. That is, the timer change effect may be executed as the look-ahead effect. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display executed until the timer change effect is executed is the fluctuation time during which the timer change effect can be executed, and the fluctuation time during which the timer change effect can be executed. If so, the timer change effect may be executed. Then, the hold display H may be changed instead of the active display AH by the timer change effect.

In this embodiment, the ball thrown toward the hold display or the active display always hits the target hold display or the active display. However, it may be set so that the thrown ball does not hit the target hold display or active display. For example, it is possible to replace the failure pattern in which the ball passes through without hitting the hold display or active display of the target well due to the crosswind on the way, or to add more such failure patterns. Be done.

As the specific effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may adopt only one of the hold change effect and the active hold change effect described so far, or may adopt both of them. Further, as the content of the pending change effect, it is conceivable that at least one (or all) of all the effects including the modified examples described so far is adopted. Similarly, as the content of the active hold change effect, it is conceivable that at least one (or all) of all the effects including the modified examples described so far is adopted.

In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the LED driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be installed. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (LED, LED, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. You may also provide two substrates, one with the second effect control substrate.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 outputs the audio output shown on another board (for example, FIG. 3). A production control command is transmitted to the board 70, the LED driver board 35, etc., or a sound / LED board having a function of a circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the LED driver board 35). Then, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the LED driver board 35, and the sound / LED board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and LED control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the present embodiment, and similarly, the audio output board 70 and the LED driver board 35. Alternatively, display control can be performed according to a command received from the sound / LED board. In the case of such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 may similarly make various decisions made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the present embodiment, or the sound output board 70. , The LED driver board 35, or a control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the sound / LED board may perform the operation.

In this embodiment, one variation pattern command is transmitted when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, and the like. Although the example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called second). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called second stop). A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by the two commands in this way, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the judgment result of the display result by the effect processing at the time of winning, Then, the look-ahead determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation. Further, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

This embodiment can also be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko game machine 1. The program and data for realizing this embodiment are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, and are pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. You may take the form of distribution by installing it. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The embodiment of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

As an example of this embodiment, a game machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) may be adopted without any problem. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

In this embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. .. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

In this embodiment, as the "ratio (ratio, probability)", a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , It also includes the case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0%.

In this embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. A control example is shown. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the probability change determining device is controlled to the probability change state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a lower plate error detection process in the effect control main process. In the lower plate error detection process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the lower plate error notification flag is set (S1041). When the lower plate error notification flag is not set (S1041; N), whether or not the lower plate error is detected, that is, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the lower plate 4 by the lower plate sensor 130. Is determined (S1042). When the lower plate error is detected (S1042; Y), the lower plate error notification flag is set (S1043), the frame LED 28 is started to light, and the lower plate error detection process is completed (S1004). If no lower plate error is detected (S1042; N), the lower plate error detection process is terminated without executing the processes of S1043 and S1044.

On the other hand, when the lower plate error detection flag is set in S1041 (S1041; Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the lower plate error is detected (S1045). When no lower plate error is detected (S1045; N), that is, when the game ball is removed from the lower plate 4, the lower plate error notification flag is cleared (S1046) and the frame LED 28 is turned off. The dish error detection process is terminated (S1047).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 101 can detect a lower plate error, and when the lower plate error is detected, the frame LED 28 is turned on. The occurrence of the lower plate error can be notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 101 may be able to detect an error other than the lower plate error. In this way, when the effect control CPU 101 can detect a plurality of errors including the lower plate error, the lighting mode of the frame LED 28 may be changed according to the detected error, or the pachinko machine may be used. A plurality of LEDs may be provided in the gaming machine 1, and the LEDs to be turned on may be different according to the detected error. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may notify that the error has been detected by the sound output from the speaker 27 or the display of the image on the effect display device 9 based on the detection of the error.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in response to the CPU 56 executing the special symbol changing process (S303), the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect symbol changing process (S802), and the effect display device 9 is used. Image display control, voice control from the speaker 27, light emission control of the frame LED 28, and the like are executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol variation processing to display the variation of the special symbol of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b in the cycle T1. It repeatedly turns on and off. The on / off and repetition of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b in this cycle T1 is continued until the fluctuation time of the special symbol set for each fluctuation pattern elapses. ..

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 101 turns on and off the frame LED 28 in the cycle T2, which is a cycle longer than the cycle T1, while the fluctuation display and the deceleration control are not being executed by executing the effect symbol changing process. And are repeatedly executed, and during the fluctuation display and the execution of the deceleration control, the frame LED 28 is repeatedly turned on and off in the cycle T3, which is a cycle longer than the cycle T2.

That is, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b in the present embodiment have a cycle T1 until the fluctuation display is completed regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed during the fluctuation display. The lighting and extinguishing are repeatedly executed, and the frame LED 28 changes depending on whether the deceleration control is being executed or not being executed during the fluctuation display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation display mode of the special symbol from changing during the execution period of the deceleration control, and the variation display of the special symbol is not recognized by the player during the deceleration control.

Further, when a lower plate error occurs, the frame LED 28 in this embodiment is continuously lit until the lower plate error is no longer detected, regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed or not. Therefore, the player can recognize that the lower plate error has occurred due to the lighting of the frame LED 28 regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed.

33 and 34 are flowcharts showing the player setting process (S709) in the effect control main process. In the player setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the volume meter, which will be described later, is being displayed (S1051). When the volume meter is being displayed (S1051; Y), the process proceeds to S1085, and when the volume meter is not being displayed (S1051; N), it is determined whether or not the light intensity meter, which will be described later, is being displayed (S1052). .. When the light intensity meter is being displayed (S1052; Y), the process proceeds to S1088, and when the light intensity meter is not being displayed (S1052; N), it is determined whether or not the sample sound described later is being output (S1053). .. If the sample sound is being output (S1053; Y), the process proceeds to S1065, and if the sample sound is not being output (S1053; N), it is determined whether or not the sample light, which will be described later, is being output (S1054). .. When the sample light is being output (S1054; Y), the process proceeds to S1072, and when the sample light is not being output (S1054; N), the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the variable display is executed and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1055).

If the value of the effect control process flag is not the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception wait process (S1055; N), the process proceeds to S1081, and if the value of the effect control process flag is the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception wait process (S1055; N). S1055; Y) determines whether or not the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed on the effect display device 9 (S1056). Although the details will be described later, the volume / light amount adjustment screen accepts the operations of the trigger button 125 and the push button 120 when the fluctuation display is not executed and the jackpot game does not appear. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the above.

When the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed (S1056; Y), the process proceeds to S1059, and when the volume / light amount adjustment screen is not displayed (S1056; N), the volume / light amount adjustment screen is called, that is, the trigger. It is determined whether or not the operation of the button 125 or the push button 120 has been accepted (S1057). When the call operation of the volume / light amount adjustment screen is accepted (S1057; Y), the display of the volume / light amount adjustment screen on the effect display device 9 is started, the player setting process is completed (S1058), and the volume / light amount adjustment screen is completed. If the call operation of is not accepted (S1057; N), the player setting process is terminated without executing S1058.

As shown in FIG. 35, the volume / light amount adjustment screen in this embodiment has a dialog 5HH in which the volume output from the speaker 27 can be selected by the operation stick within a set value range of 2 to 14, and a frame LED 28. Dialog 5HL, in which the output light amount (brightness) can be selected from 45%, 60%, 75%, and 100% by the operation stick, is displayed.

Further, in S1059, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the volume change operation by the operation of the operation stick is accepted while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed. If the volume change operation is not accepted (S1059; N), the process proceeds to S1066, and if the volume change operation is accepted (S1059; Y), the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed according to the accepted volume change operation. Is updated (S1060). Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the push button 120 is operated after the volume to be changed is selected by the operation of the operation stick (tilt operation), and the volume accepts the volume setting operation. The change operation process is executed (S1061), and it is determined whether or not the determination operation is accepted in the volume change operation process (S1062).

When the determination operation is not accepted in the volume change operation process (S1062; N), the player setting process is terminated, and when the determination operation is accepted in the volume change operation process (S1062; Y), the volume is set to S1061. (S1063) is specified to the selected value (set value) set in the process of, and the specified selected value (set value) is updated as the volume (S1064). Then, the sample sound output process for outputting the sample sound at the updated volume in the process of S1064 from the speaker 27 is executed, and the player setting process is completed (S1065).

Further, in S1066, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of changing the light amount by the operation of the operation stick is accepted while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. When the light amount change operation is not accepted (S1066; N), the player setting process is terminated, and when the light amount change operation is accepted (S1066; Y), the volume / light amount is changed according to the received light amount change operation. The display of the adjustment screen is updated (S1067). Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the push button 120 is operated after the change destination light amount is selected by the operation of the operation stick (tilt operation), thereby accepting the light amount setting operation. The change operation process is executed (S1068), and it is determined whether or not the determination operation is accepted in the light intensity change operation process (S1069).

When the determination operation is not accepted in the light intensity change operation process (S1069; N), the player setting process is terminated, and when the determination operation is accepted in the light intensity change operation process (S1069; Y), the light intensity is set to S1068. The selected value (set value) set in the above process is specified (S1070), and the specified selected value (set value) is updated as the amount of light (S1071). Then, the sample light output process for outputting the sample light with the updated light amount in the process of the frame LED 28 to S1071 is executed, and the player setting process is completed (S1072).

Further, in S1081, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50 is accepted during the variable display or the big hit game. When the operation of the volume / light amount change button is not accepted (S1081; N), the player setting process is finished, and when the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50 is accepted (S1081; Y), the accepted operation is performed. It is determined whether or not the volume is changed, that is, whether or not the upper end or the lower end of the volume / light amount changing button 50 is operated (S1082). That is, in this embodiment, the operating means operated by the player or the like to change the volume and the amount of light during the variable display during the execution or the jackpot game, and the volume and the volume when the variable display is not being executed or the jackpot game is not in progress. Since the operation means operated by the player or the like for changing the amount of light is different, the effect display device is operated by the player by operating the operation stick, the push button 120, the trigger button 125, or the like during the execution period of the operation effect. It is prevented that erroneous control such as displaying the volume / light amount adjustment screen on 9 is executed.

When the received operation is a volume change operation (S1082; Y), the volume is specified as a selection value (set value) based on the received volume change operation (S1083), and the specified selection value (set value) is specified. Is updated as the volume (S1084). Then, a volume meter for displaying a volume meter corresponding to the volume updated in the process of S1084 at a predetermined position on the effect display device 9 (for example, the upper right part of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 36A). The display process is executed (S1085). After executing S1085, the sample sound output process is executed to end the player setting process.

Although not particularly shown, when the volume meter display process is executed when the volume meter is not displayed on the effect display device 9 (that is, when the volume meter display process is executed after S1084), the updated volume is used. The display of the volume meter according to the above is started in the effect display device 9, and the volume meter display period counter indicating the period for displaying the volume meter on the effect display device 9 is set. Further, when the volume meter display process is executed after the process of S1051, that is, when the volume meter is being displayed, the value of the volume meter display period counter is subtracted each time the volume meter display process is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the volume meter display period counter becomes 0 (the volume meter display period counter has timered out), the display of the volume meter on the effect display device 9 may be terminated.

Further, although not particularly shown, when the sample sound output process (S1065) is executed in a state where the sample sound output has not been started, the voice control execution data for outputting the sample sound from the speaker 27 is output for each sample sound. The sample sound output process table that is sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with the process data n (1 to N) is selected, and the sample sound output process data of the selected sample sound output process table is selected. By starting the sample sound output process timer in No. 1, the sample sound output is started at the updated volume from the speaker 27. When the sample sound output process is executed during the output of the sample sound, the value of the sample sound output process timer is subtracted, and the speaker 27 has a volume updated according to the value of the sample sound output process timer. You can output the sample sound from.

In S1082, when the received operation is a light amount changing operation (S1082; N), the light amount is specified as a selection value (set value) based on the received light amount changing operation (S1086), and the specified selection value (S1086) is specified. The set value) is updated as the amount of light (S1087). Then, a light amount meter for displaying a light amount meter corresponding to the light amount updated in the process of S1087 at a predetermined position on the effect display device 9 (for example, the upper right part of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 36B). The display process is executed (S1088). After executing S1088, the sample light output process is executed to end the player setting process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, from the time when the processing of S1064 and the processing of S1084 are executed, the volume is changed by the operation of the operation stick of the player or the like, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button 50. From the time when the sound is output from the speaker 27 and the processing of S1071 or S1087 is executed, the frame LED 28 is changed by the operation of the operation stick of the player or the like, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button 50. Light is output from. That is, when the volume or the amount of light is changed during the execution of the deceleration control, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 or the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 from the hold change effect in which the deceleration control is executed. Changes.

Although not particularly shown, when the light intensity meter display process is executed in the state where the light intensity meter is not displayed on the effect display device 9 (that is, when the light intensity meter display process is executed after S1088), the updated light intensity is used. The display of the light intensity meter according to the above is started in the effect display device 9, and the light intensity meter display period counter indicating the period for displaying the light intensity meter on the effect display device 9 is set. Further, when the light intensity meter display process is executed after the process of S1052, that is, when the light intensity meter is being displayed, the value of the light intensity meter display period counter is subtracted each time the light intensity meter display process is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the light intensity meter display period counter becomes 0 (the light intensity meter display period counter has timed out), the display of the light intensity meter in the effect display device 9 may be terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume and the amount of light are changed during the execution of the variable display and the big hit game, and the volume and the amount of light are changed during the non-execution of the variable display and the big hit game. The images displayed on the display device 9 (the volume / light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 35 and the volume meter / light amount meter shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B) are different. Specifically, when changing the volume or the amount of light during the execution of the variable display or the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 35, the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed using the entire display area of the effect display device 9. On the other hand, when changing the volume or the amount of light when the variable display is not being executed or the big hit game is not being performed, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), the upper right part of the effect display device 9 is displayed. Display the volume meter and light intensity meter using only the area of.

In this way, when the volume and the amount of light are changed during the execution of the variable display or during the big hit game, the effect display device 9 is more than when the volume and the amount of light are changed during the non-execution of the variable display or during the big hit game. By displaying only the volume meter and the light intensity meter in a small display area, it is possible to suppress a decrease in visibility of the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 and the effect during the big hit game. Further, during the execution of the variable display or the big hit game, the variable display is not executed or the big hit game is not performed due to the display of the effect image on the effect display device 9, the sound output from the speaker 27, the light emission of the frame LED 28, or the like. Since a high processing load is applied to the effect control CPU 101, the effect control CPU 101 can be further suppressed by displaying only the volume meter and the light amount meter on the effect display device 9 by changing the volume and the amount of light. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, since the frame LED 28 is controlled by the effect control CPU 101, the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 is determined by the effect control CPU 101 executing the player setting process. Although it can be changed, the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the normal symbol display 10, Since the normal symbol hold storage display 41 and the like are controlled by the CPU 56, it is impossible to change the amount of light even if the effect control CPU 101 executes the player setting process.

As described above, in the player setting process in this embodiment, the sample sound output and the sample light output are executed only in one aspect regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is executed. Furthermore, regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed or not, the display of the volume meter or the light intensity meter is updated (display start or end of the volume meter or the light intensity meter) and the volume / light intensity adjustment screen is displayed in only one mode. Update the display of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (C), the effect control CPU 101 executes deceleration control during the fluctuation display when the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is changed. A series of sample sounds are output over the period T4 regardless of whether or not the sound is displayed and whether or not the variable display is in progress. That is, the sample sound in this embodiment is always output from the speaker 27 at a constant speed (that is, a constant reproduction speed) regardless of whether or not the fluctuation display or deceleration control is executed. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C), does the effect control CPU 101 execute deceleration control during the fluctuation display when the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 is changed? A series of sample lights are output over the period T5 regardless of whether or not the variable display is in progress. That is, the sample light in this embodiment is always output at T5 for a certain period of time regardless of whether or not the fluctuation display or deceleration control is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (B), the effect control CPU 101 executes deceleration control during the fluctuation display when the volume or light amount is changed by operating the volume / light amount change button 50. Regardless of whether or not it is set, the display of the volume meter and the light intensity meter in the effect display device 9 is updated (display start or display end of the volume meter and the light intensity meter) at 2 ms, which is the activation interval of the effect control in this embodiment. To execute. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39C, when the operation stick or the push button 120 is operated in the effect control CPU 101 when the fluctuation display is not executed without the deceleration control being executed. Also in this embodiment, the display of the volume / light amount adjustment screen is updated at 2 ms, which is the activation interval of the effect control in this embodiment (start / end of display of the volume / light amount adjustment screen, dialog 5HH or dialog according to the operation of the operation stick). Update the display in 5HL) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the volume and the amount of light are changed when the variable display is not being executed or the big hit game is not being performed, the player or the like operates the push button 120 to adjust the volume and the amount of light to the effect display device 9. After displaying the screen, the volume and light amount are selected as the change destination values by operating the operation rod, and the volume and light amount are updated to the change destination values by operating the push button 120. When the volume or light amount is changed during the display execution or the jackpot game, the player or the like operates the volume / light amount change button 50 to immediately change the volume or light amount according to the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50. Since the amount of light is updated, the player can change the volume and the amount of light while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, while the hold change effect is being executed, the hold change effect can be executed at different speeds during the execution and non-execution of the deceleration control. The output of sample sound from the speaker 27, the output of sample light from the frame LED, the volume meter and light intensity meter in the effect display device 9, and the update of the volume / light intensity adjustment screen can be performed regardless of whether deceleration control is being executed or not. Since it is executed at a constant speed, the output of the sample sound from the speaker 27 and the output of the sample light from the frame LED, the volume meter, the light intensity meter, and the volume of the effect display device 9 when the deceleration control is being executed or not being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally changing the volume and the amount of light due to the change in the updating speed of the light amount adjustment screen.

In particular, in this embodiment, the volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen in the effect display device 9 are updated according to the operation of the operation rod, the push button 120, the volume / light amount change button 50, etc. by the player. Since the deceleration control is executed at a constant speed regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed or not being executed, an appropriate volume meter or light amount meter corresponding to the volume or light amount, and a volume / light amount adjustment screen can be displayed on the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the display of the volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen in the effect display device 9 is updated according to the operation of the operation rod, the push button 120, the volume / light amount change button 50, etc. by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a detection means such as a motion sensor capable of detecting the movement of the player in a non-contact manner is provided, and the effect is produced based on the detection result by the detection means. The display of the volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen on the display device 9 may be updated.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the light output from the frame LED based on the acceptance of the operation of the operation rod, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button 50 by the player or the like. When the amount of light is updated, it is possible to output the sample sound and sample light at the updated volume and amount of light, and these sample sounds and sample light are irrespective of whether or not deceleration control is being executed. Since it is output in a common (same) mode, the output sound and light are output because the mode of these sample sounds and sample lights is different between the execution and non-execution of deceleration control. It is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the sound is not the sample sound or the sample light.

The "mode" of the sample sound in the present invention includes the execution speed (reproduction speed), the pitch, the period from the change of the volume to the start of the output of the sample sound, the output period of the sample sound, and the like. .. Further, the "mode" of the sample light in the present invention includes the execution speed, the light emission pattern, the period from the change of the light amount to the start of the output of the sample light, the output period of the sample light, and the like.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can detect the lower plate error, and even during the detection of the lower plate error, the operation stick of the player or the like, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button. Since the volume and the amount of light can be changed based on the operation of 50, it is possible to prevent the convenience of the player regarding the change of the volume and the amount of light from being lowered.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the volume or the amount of light is changed based on the operation of the operation stick of the player or the like, the push button 120, or the volume / light amount change button 50 during the execution of the deceleration control, the deceleration control is executed. Since the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 can be changed during the hold change effect, the interest of the hold change effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the volume or light amount is changed based on the operation of the operation rod, the push button 120, or the volume / light amount change button 50 of the player or the like during the execution of the deceleration control, the deceleration control is executed. The mode in which the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 are changed during the pending change effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the deceleration control is used. If the volume or light intensity is changed based on the operation of the player's operation rod, push button 120, or volume / light intensity change button 50 during execution, the deceleration control is completed or the deceleration control is executed. The volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed after the end of the pending change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a hold change effect, a pattern that changes the display mode of the hold display TH and a pattern that does not change the display mode of the hold display TH can be executed, and the display mode of the hold display TH is changed. Since it is possible to execute deceleration control for decelerating the effect speed of the color ball 931 acting on the hold display TH at a common timing between the pattern and the pattern that does not change the display mode of the hold display TH, the hold display TH can be used. By changing the acting color ball 931, the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the hold display H and the active display AH have different display speeds regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is executed, unlike the hold change effect in which the deceleration control is executed. Is constant, it is possible to prevent the hold display H and the active display AH from being mistakenly recognized as displays related to the hold change effect. Further, since the hold display H and the active display AH in this embodiment are rotation displays at a constant speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is executed, these hold display H and the active display AH relate to the hold change effect. It is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning sound can be output when the display of the active display AH or the holding display H is started based on the occurrence of the starting winning sound, and the deceleration control is executed for the winning sound. Since the speaker 27 outputs the sound at a constant speed (reproduction speed) regardless of whether or not the sound is output, the player has started displaying the active display AH and the hold display H by outputting the winning sound. Can be properly recognized.

In this embodiment, when the display of the active display AH or the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, the winning sound is played at a constant speed (reproduction) regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed or not. Although the form of outputting from the speaker 27 is illustrated in terms of speed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 depending on whether or not deceleration control is executed. The speed (reproduction speed) may be different.

Further, since the frame LED 28 of this embodiment can be lit in different cycles, that is, in different patterns between the execution and non-execution of the deceleration control, the frame LED 28 can be set to the speed of the hold change effect during the deceleration control. Correspondingly, it lights up, and the effect of the pending change effect can be enhanced.

Further, the frame LED 28 in the present embodiment changes the light emitting cycle, that is, the light emitting pattern depending on whether or not the deceleration control is being executed, while the first special symbol that repeatedly turns on and off as a variable display of the special symbol. Since the display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are always lit in a constant cycle, that is, in a constant light emission pattern regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being executed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is decelerated. It is possible to prevent the player from not being properly recognized during the execution of the control.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are exemplified as the first light emitting means that always lights up at a constant cycle regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first light emitting means is a first special symbol holding storage display 18a or a first light emitting means that emits light regardless of whether or not deceleration control is being executed under the control of the CPU 56. 2 The special symbol hold storage display 18b, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 may be used.

The frame LED 28 of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the deceleration control is turned on at different cycles during execution and non-execution, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame LED 28 is not limited to this. , It may be lit at a constant cycle regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the player can change the light amount of the frame LED 28 by operating the operation stick, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button 50, while the first special symbol display. Since it is impossible for the player to change the light intensity of the device 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the light intensity of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is determined by the player or the like. By changing it, it is possible to prevent the player from not properly recognizing the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b of this embodiment, when a lower plate error is detected, the cycle T1 is the same as when the lower plate error is not detected. On the other hand, when the lower plate error is detected, the frame LED 28 lights in a pattern different from that when the lower plate error is not detected (it continues to light until the lower plate error is cleared). Even when a lower plate error occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the player grasps that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by lighting the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. At the same time, it can be grasped that the lower plate error has occurred due to the lighting of the frame LED 28.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above embodiment, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated by a player or the like during the execution of the fluctuation display, the volume / light amount is updated regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed or not. Although the mode of displaying the volume meter and the light intensity meter on the effect display device 9 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 3, the volume / light intensity change button 50 is pressed during execution of deceleration control. When the operation is performed, the volume and the light amount may be updated, while the effect display device 9 may not display the volume meter and the light amount meter according to the update of the volume and the light amount. By doing so, even though the deceleration control is executed during the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed at a speed different from the update speed of the volume meter and the light intensity meter, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be prevented from being given.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated by a player or the like during the execution of the fluctuation display, the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated regardless of whether the deceleration control is being executed or not. Although the mode of executing the output of the sample sound and the sample light at the changed volume and the amount of light based on the operation of is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 4, the execution of deceleration control is performed. If the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the operation, the sample sound or sample light output at the changed volume / light amount based on the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50 may not be executed. .. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the output of the sample sound and the sample light during the execution of the deceleration control.

Further, in the present modification 4, as an example of limiting the output of the sample sound when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, a mode in which the sample sound is not output is illustrated. Not limited to this, as a form of limiting the output of the sample sound when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, the sample sound is output at the lowest volume or the volume "0". The output volume of the sample sound may be made smaller than that of the effect sound during deceleration control.

Further, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the deceleration control, the sample sound and the sample light are not output during the deceleration control, but are output from the speaker 27 during the deceleration control. The volume of sound and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed.

Further, when the volume / light amount change button 50 is operated during the deceleration control, the sample sound and the sample light are not output during the deceleration control, but are output from the speaker 27 after the deceleration control is completed. The volume of the sound and the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the visibility of the active display AH and the hold display H is not particularly changed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being executed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modification 5, the deceleration control is being executed in the hold change effect by making the visibility of the active display AH and the hold display H different from those during the non-execution of the deceleration control. It may be easy for the player to recognize that.

It should be noted that what is "different from the visibility" in the present invention is not only that the visibility by the player is different due to the difference in contrast, transparency, etc. of the displayed active display AH and the hold display H, but also on the other hand. It is also included that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the active display AH and the hold display H by not displaying the active display AH and the hold display H during the period of.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display of the active display AH or the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, the winning sound is played at a constant speed (reproduction) regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed or not. Although the form of outputting from the speaker 27 is illustrated in terms of speed), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 6, if a start prize is generated during execution of deceleration control, a prize is won. By limiting the sound output, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the hold change effect during deceleration control from being reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a winning sound is output as a special effect when the display of the active display AH or the holding display H is started based on the occurrence of the starting winning is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The effect to be executed when the display of the active display AH or the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning is an effect other than the output of the winning sound (for example, specific to the effect display device 9). It may be an effect of displaying an image, an effect of causing the frame LED 28 to emit light, or the like).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which deceleration control is executed during the hold change effect to change the display mode of the active display AH and the hold display H to be changed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the effect of executing the deceleration control may be an effect other than the hold change effect, such as a variable display of the effect symbol, a specific reach effect, or an effect during a big hit game. In this way, when the deceleration control is executed in an effect other than the hold change effect, as a modification 7, the change in the display mode of the active display AH or the hold display H, which is the target of the hold change during the execution of the deceleration control, is changed. By limiting the display, it may be possible to prevent the effect of executing the deceleration control from being lowered due to the player paying attention to the active display AH and the hold display H.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the hold change effect can be executed as the effect during the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is the effect during the variable display. An effect other than the hold change effect may be executed, such as a change notice effect for notifying that a big hit will occur, or a look-ahead notice effect for announcing that the change display result will be a big hit in the hold memory. In this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of effects including the hold change effect during the variable display, as a modification 8, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display are displayed even during the execution of any of the effects. While the vessel 8b is lit in a fixed pattern, the frame LED 28 may be lit in a lighting pattern for each effect to enhance each effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which light is output from the frame LED 28 during execution of deceleration control is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and light is emitted from the frame LED 28 during execution of deceleration control. May be provided when is not output. In the case where the case where the light is not output from the frame LED 28 during the execution of the deceleration control is provided as described above, as a modification 9, if the ratio of the light output from the frame LED 28 during the execution of the deceleration control is different depending on the number of reserved memories. You may improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the game machine. The number of rented balls lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored in the game. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 101 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time and a type of reach effect, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variation is started. As shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 101 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 56 uses the first command to, for example, set the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before reaching the reach (or before the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached). The command to be shown is sent, and the second command shows the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect. A command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 101 is used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. You may make a selection with. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a game ball is launched from below the game area by a hitting ball launching device has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hitting ball launching device is used as a pachinko gaming machine 1. By providing the game ball at a position above the game area in the above, the game ball may be launched from a position above the game area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only a jackpot that can acquire a large number of game balls is generated by opening the jackpot in the jackpot game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, as a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot is provided in which the opening time of the jackpot in a round game is extremely short so that the player does not recognize that the jackpot has been opened, and suddenly due to the occurrence of the jackpot. It may be a sudden jackpot that makes it look like it is in a probable state. In addition, when a sudden big hit is provided in this way, a small hit that opens the big winning opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game of the probable big hit is provided, and the probable big hit or A state (so-called latent state) in which it is unknown whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the small hit is in the high probability state or the low probability state may occur.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the starting winning opening is two, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting is not limited to this. There may be only one winning opening, or the starting winning opening may be three or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the special symbol is set to two, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one special symbol is used. Or, the number of special symbols may be 3 or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol, which is the display result, in a variable manner, and then stop and display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed after a plurality of types of special symbols are variablely displayed without including the final stop symbol that is the display result. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol that is the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

The advantageous state for the player is a specific game state (big hit, etc.) that is advantageous for the player who can acquire many game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states in which the expected value of the game medium that can be acquired is different ( A high-probability game state (high-probability state) with a high probability of becoming the specific game state, or a high-base state (time saving state) in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be satisfied than in a normal game state (such as a big hit with a different number of rounds). ), High probability and low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the effect display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and a prize is awarded according to the variable display result derived to the effect display device. It is also applicable to slot machines where is possible.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and is an effect executing means (for example, a holding change effect) capable of executing a game-related effect (for example, a hold change effect). The operation of the player's operation (for example, the operation rod, the push button 120, the trigger button 125, and the volume / light amount change button 50) and the operation of the player (for example, the part that executes the effect symbol changing process after the effect control CPU 101 executes the look-ahead advance notice process). ), And the effect execution means includes a setting means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the player setting process shown in FIG. 33), and the effect execution means has a first period (for example, for example). It is possible to execute the effect at different traveling speeds between the first period (when the deceleration control is not executed) and the second period (for example, when the deceleration control is executed) different from the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). When the deceleration control is executed, the hold change effect is executed at a slower speed (slow motion) than when the deceleration control is not executed), and the speeds related to the setting in the setting means are the first period and the second period. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, a series of sample sounds output from the speaker 27 when the volume is changed and a series of output from the frame LED 28 when the amount of light is changed. It can operate at a position where the output of the sample light ends in a certain period of time, that is, a part where the sample light is output at a constant speed, and a position where the player can contact (for example, a position below the pachinko game machine 901). (For example, an operation module 90M having an operation lever 9031) and an abnormality notification means capable of executing at least an abnormality notification regarding the movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) have a sub-side error shown in FIG. When the movable body is in the first state (for example, the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operation lever 9031 is not operating and is located in the operable position). When the operation of the movable body is hindered, and when the movable body is in a second state different from the first state (for example, the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operation lever 9031 is operating, from the operable position. The mode of abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means is different from that when the operation of the movable body is hindered when the movable body is being displaced to the storage position (for example, as shown in FIG. 68) by the player. When an operation lever error occurs due to continuous lever operation, an error display is displayed on the effect display device 905, but an error sound is emitted. An mode in which an error is notified in a mode in which no output is performed, and when an overload error occurs in which the operation lever 9031 cannot be displaced due to a foreign object being caught, an error display is displayed on the effect display device 5 and an error sound is output. The part that notifies the error in) Game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from making unintended settings. In addition, it is possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body.

Further, in the game machine, the speed related to the abnormality notification (for example, the display speed and the sound reproduction speed) may not change between the first period and the second period. According to such a configuration, abnormality notification can be suitably performed.

Further, as an example of the form of the game machine which can prevent the player from making unintended settings and can perform the abnormality notification according to the situation of the movable body, the game machine capable of playing the game. (For example, a pachinko game machine 901), which is an operation module having a movable body (for example, an operation lever 9031) operably provided at a position where a player can contact (for example, a position below the pachinko game machine 901). 90M) and at least an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification regarding the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 performs sub-side error processing shown in FIG. 66), and the movable body is the first. When the operation of the movable body is hindered in a state (for example, a state in which the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operation lever 9031 is not operating and is located at an operable position), and the movable body Is a second state different from the first state (for example, a state in which the lever motor 9036 that displaces the operating lever 9031 is operating and is being displaced from the operable position to the storage position). The mode of abnormality notification by the abnormality notification means is different from that when the operation of the above is hindered (for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when an operation lever error occurs due to the continuation of lever operation by the player, the effect is produced. When an error is displayed on the display device 905 but no error sound is output, and an overload error occurs in which the operation lever 9031 cannot be displaced due to a foreign object being caught or the like, the effect display device 5 A part for notifying an error in a mode of displaying an error display and outputting an error sound). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 50 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the back side will be described as the rear (rear) side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a facing surface facing the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, the part described as "step S901" may be abbreviated as "S901". Further, in this embodiment, "execution" and "implementation" are synonymous.

FIG. 50 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko game machine 901 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) is roughly divided into a game board 902 (gauge board) constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame 903 (underframe) for supporting and fixing the game board 902. ) And. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball is launched from a ball launching device into the game area and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 50, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and each of them is used in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B each variablely display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". The present invention is not limited, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those that are turned on by the 7-segment LED and those that are turned off may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 904B is the "second special symbol". Also called.

Both the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are formed in a square shape, for example. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), and the types may be the same. It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B may be configured to variablely display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99", respectively. However, each of the segments indicating "00" to "99" may be configured to display "00" to "99" in an invisible and randomly arranged display.

An effect display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area of the game board 902. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three are corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B. In the effect symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as, the effect symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each is variablely displayed. The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of either the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A or the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 904B, "left". , "Middle", and "Right", the effect symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. After that, the final effect symbols (final stop symbols) are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect display devices 905.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 904A or the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B is used. Synchronized with the special figure game, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and the final effect symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivative"). It should be noted that the variation display may be temporarily stopped during the variation display of the effect symbol.

There are eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters) that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the production symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be any number of types as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as "big hit" combinations and "missing" combinations can be configured (for example, seven types). 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of the effect symbol is started, by the time the final effect symbol is derived and displayed, each effect symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", or the effect symbol In at least one of the display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" effect symbol display area 905L, etc.), for example, the symbol numbers flow from the upper to the lower in order from the smallest to the largest. When the scroll display is performed and the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the effect symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed.

A first reserved storage display area 905D and a second reserved storage display area 905U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (entering). The hold memory display generated based on the start winning by entering) is changed to a round blue display.

In the following description, the display in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U may be collectively referred to as hold display.

In the example shown in FIG. 50, along with the hold storage display area, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold display 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of reserved storages in the variable display obtained by adding the number of reserved storages in the first special figure and the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is particularly referred to as the total number of reserved storages.

Below the effect display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state where it is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball device 906B, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening changes into an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter).

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 51. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 51. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 "), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 "), the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided at a position below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 51, and a predetermined area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the large winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 that has been opened, the game ball passes through another winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 50, below the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

On the side of the normal symbol display 9020, a normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and an effect LED 909 is provided around the game area.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor included in the hitting ball launching device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, an upper plate that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls paid out by renting so that they can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. (Striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate (not shown) is provided to hold (store) excess balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Further, a bulging portion 9030 that bulges in front of the game machine is formed at a lower position of the upper plate, and an operation lever 9031 that can be operated by the player is on the upper side of the upper surface of the bulging portion 9030. It is provided so that it can be projected. The operation lever 9031 is provided with a push button 9031A that can be pressed by the player on the upper end surface thereof, and is provided with a push button 9031A in a state of protruding from the upper surface of the bulging portion 9030. It is possible to tilt the grip portion of the upper end of the sword, which has a substantially pentagonal shape, toward the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the mechanism by which the operating lever 9031 of this embodiment protrudes will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 52, an operation module 90M having an operation lever 9031 is housed inside the bulge portion 9030. A storage recess 9030'that can store the grip portion having the push button 9031A is formed in the upper part of the bulging portion 9030, and when the grip portion is stored in the storage recess 9030', the push is pushed. Only the operation of the button 9031A is possible, and the tilting operation of the operation lever 9031 is impossible.

The operation module 90M includes a fixed base portion 9029 for fixing the operation module 90M, and a tubular elevating unit 9033 in which a lower end portion thereof is swingably connected to the fixed base portion 9029 in the front-rear direction. It is provided so as to project upward from the center position of the upper end surface of the elevating unit 9033, and is mainly composed of an operation lever 9031 having a push button 9031A.

The operation lever 9031 has an elevating arm 9032 inserted inside the elevating unit 9033, and the elevating arm 9032 is raised and lowered by the elevating unit 9033 so that the grip portion is stored in the storage recess 9030'. It is said that it can be displaced (can appear and disappear) in a state where it is provided and a state in which the grip portion protrudes from the storage recess 9030'.

At the lower end of the elevating unit 9033, a lever motor 9036 that is connected to an effect control board 9012 and whose operation is controlled by the effect control board 9012 is built in, and is rotated by the lever motor 9036. The rotating shaft 9036'is inserted into the elevating arm 9032 from the lower end of the elevating arm 9032. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the lever motor 9036.

A spiral groove portion is formed on the rotary shaft 9036'of this embodiment, and a groove engaging portion screwed with the groove portion is formed on the elevating arm 9032 to rotate the rotary shaft 9036' in a forward direction. As a result, the elevating arm 9032 rises, and the elevating arm 9032 descends by rotating the rotating shaft 9036'in the reverse direction.

Further, on the rear side of the elevating unit 9033, as shown in FIG. 52, a spring 9039 is erected substantially horizontally between the side surface of the elevating unit 9033 and the internal side surface (rear surface) of the bulging portion 9030. The elevating unit 9033 and the operating lever 9031 are urged so as to be always positioned at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 52 (A)) in the non-operated state, and are tilted against the urging of the spring 9039. When the operation of the operating lever 9031 is completed (when the player releases the hand), the operating lever 9031 returns to a predetermined position in the non-operated state by the urging of the spring 9039.

The storage recess 9030'is provided with a boot having an insertion hole 9034 into which the elevating arm 9032 is inserted and an elastic member provided so as to close the insertion hole 9034. By closing the 9034, it is possible to prevent game balls, dust, and the like from entering the inside of the bulging portion 9030.

Further, inside the elevating unit 9033, a lever origin detection sensor 9038 for detecting whether or not the elevating arm 9032 is located at the origin position is provided near the origin position where the elevating arm 9032 is the most lowered position. Has been done. Further, a lever operation detection sensor 9035A for detecting the presence or absence of a lever operation for tilting the operation lever 9031 forward is provided inside the fixed base portion 9029, and a push button 9031A is provided inside the operation lever 9031. A push sensor 9035B for detecting the operation of the above is provided, and each of these sensors is connected to an effect control board 9012 described later, and a detection signal can be output to the effect control board 9012. There is.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 51. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 and the like.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is a sub-side control board mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function capable of inputting an output signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the outside. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, from the game control microcomputer 90100, the switch circuit 90110 that takes in the detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the effect display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the production LED 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 can be used from the display operation of the effect display device 905, the operation of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, the operation module 90M, and the speakers 908L and 908R. It has a function to determine the control content for causing the electric component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or part of the audio output operation of the above, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation of the effect LED 909 and the like. There is. The configuration may not include the relay board 9015.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a speaker based on commands and control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for outputting audio from the 908L and 908R. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is driven to turn on / off the effect LED 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that performs the above.

As shown in FIG. 51, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball, such as a sensor. Just do it. Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, and the normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting command signals for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 53 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value corresponding to the content of instruction by the effect control command.

The command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start on the first special symbol display 904A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start on the second special symbol display 904B. The command 81XXH is a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and different EXT data is set according to the designated fluctuation pattern and the like.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating the variation display result. The command 8C00H is a command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the command is "off". The command 8C01H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" in "big hit". The command 8C02H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" in "big hit". Command 8C03H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot" in "big hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the effect symbol. The command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the game state at that time.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state and that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state and that the big winning opening is in the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that specifies the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of the round in the normal open big hit state or the short-term open big hit state (for example, "1" to "16" or "1" to "5" ”) Corresponding EXT data is set.

The command B100H is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition is satisfied by winning the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The command B200H is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition is satisfied by winning the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / output port) 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, various processes for controlling the progress of the game are executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103.

On the main board 9011, a random number value MR1'for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining a jackpot type, a random number value MR3'for determining a fluctuation pattern, a random number value MR4'for determining a normal figure display result, etc. Numerical data of various random values is controlled so that it can be counted. The random number circuit 90104 may be any one capable of counting numerical data indicating a part or all of these random numbers MR1'to MR4', and the CPU 90103 uses software for random numbers not counted by the random number circuit 90104. It suffices to count by updating various numerical data according to.

FIG. 54 shows the variation pattern of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 54 are prepared in advance. Specifically, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of the effect symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit".

A normal reach reach effect is executed for the jackpot variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit", and the reach variation pattern when the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach". There are a normal reach fluctuation pattern and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... The normal reach fluctuation pattern of is also provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to super reach α and super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 54, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach α and the super reach β, which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. .. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) at which the variable display result is "big hit" is set to be higher in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability). Further, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the player is always in the reach state and any one of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. It is also possible that a non-reach fluctuation pattern may be a big hit.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 51 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared in advance for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 54. Table data and the like that make up the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

FIG. 55 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. And the second special figure may use individual display result determination tables.

The display result determination table sets the variable display result as a "big hit" and puts it in a big hit game state before the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control based on the random number value MR1'.

In the display result determination table of this embodiment, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1'depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). (Judgment value) is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the characteristics of the "big hit". It is assigned to the figure display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Compared to (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), the probability of being determined to control the jackpot game state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

The ROM 90101 includes a jackpot type determination table and a random number value MR3 that are referred to in order to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2'when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern to any of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54 described above based on ′ is also stored.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 56 (A), the judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are determined according to whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map. Allocations are different. That is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, there is no allocation to the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds, and "probable variable big hit B" does not occur in the variable display of the second special figure. By setting this, the prize ball obtained is small during the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B due to the high opening control accompanying the time saving control. It is possible to prevent the frequent occurrence of "" and the deterioration of the game entertainment. The setting example shown in FIG. 56 (A) is only an example, and a jackpot type other than that shown in FIG. 56 (A) may be provided, and the determination ratio of each jackpot, the presence or absence of determination, etc. may be determined. It may be set appropriately.

Further, as the fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 90101, it was determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits used when it was determined in advance to be "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits to be "missing". A variation pattern determination table for deviation, which is sometimes used, is prepared in advance. In this embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined when a big hit occurs than when a hit occurs, and there is a possibility (reliability or expectation) that a big hit will occur when a reach occurs. As it becomes higher, even if the fluctuation pattern of the same reach, there is a higher possibility that the super reach will be a big hit (reliability and expectation) than the normal reach, and even if it is the same super reach, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β In order to increase the possibility of a probability variation jackpot (reliability and expectation), the determination values corresponding to each variation pattern are set in the variation pattern determination table for jackpot and the variation pattern determination table for deviation. There is.

The deviation pattern determination table includes a plurality of tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storages and the time saving state, and the total number of holding storages corresponds to 2 to 4 depending on the number of reserved storages and the time saving state. Shortening non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1'-2), shortening non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1'-3) corresponding to a total of 5 to 8 reserved storages, and shortening non-reach out-of-reach. By determining the variation pattern (PA1'-4) according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state (time saving state), the shorter the number of reserved memories is, the easier it is to execute the short variation pattern, that is, the unit time. By increasing the number of fluctuations in the hit, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary start winnings, and during the time reduction control (during the time reduction state), the non-reach of the shortening is out of line compared to when the time reduction control is not executed. By increasing the number of fluctuations per unit time by determining a large number of fluctuation patterns (PA1'-4), the period until the next big hit can be shortened, and the player's feeling of continuous villa can be improved.

The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 51 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 90102 is backed up by a backup power source from a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 90102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). , When the power is turned on again, the data indicating the progress state of the game, such as the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special figure process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls, will be inherited. do it.

The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game. In the game control data holding area, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A, and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but the first starting winning is not yet started. As the hold data of the special figure game using the special figure, the first special figure hold storage unit for storing the random number value MR1', the random number value MR2', the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3', and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. As the pending data of the special figure game using the second special figure that has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. For the second special figure holding storage unit that stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1', the random number value MR2', the random number value MR3', the normal figure holding storage unit, the progress of the game such as the special figure process flag, etc. A game control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the state, a game control timer setting unit provided with various counters used to control the progress of the game, and a game A game control counter setting unit provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress, and various types of data used to temporarily store the progress of the game. It is provided with a game control buffer setting unit provided with a buffer.

As shown in FIG. 51, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation on the effect display device 905, and update of numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. A random number circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, various processes for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components are executed by executing the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 by the effect control CPU 90120. For example, as processing for controlling these effect operations, the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 via the I / O 90125. The transmission process of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 is also performed.

On the side of the effect control board 9012, as in the case of the main board 9011, for example, various random numbers (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining the execution / non-execution of various effects and the type of effect are set. Has been done. Further, in the ROM 90121, in addition to the effect control program, the effect operation including the operations of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M is controlled. Various table data used for, for example, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables for determining execution / non-execution of various effects, type of effect, etc., and an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. Pattern data etc. are stored.

Among the effect control patterns, the effect control pattern at the time of special symbol change corresponds to each variation pattern, and the variation display of the effect symbol during the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol. From data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the movement and the reach effect of operating each movable body (first movable accessory 90300, second movable accessory 90400, third movable accessory 90500, operation module 90M). It is configured.

Further, the RAM 90122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011, and various effect operations. The effect control timer setting unit and the effect control counter setting unit provided with multiple types of timers and counters used to control the progress of the effect, and the data used to control the progress of various effect operations are temporarily stored. It is equipped with an effect control buffer setting unit in which various buffers for storing are provided.

In this embodiment, a storage area (buffer number "1-1") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. ~ "Area corresponding to" 1-4 ") and storage area (buffer numbers" 2-1 "to" 2- "corresponding to the maximum value (for example," 4 ") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. An area corresponding to "4") is provided, and data constituting a hold storage buffer capable of specifying the status of hold storage at that time is stored, and a first hold storage display is performed based on the data of the hold storage buffer. The hold display of the area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U is displayed.

The first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 9012, and the first movable accessory 90300 and the first movable accessory 90300 are connected to the effect control board 9012. The operations of the two movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M are controlled by the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, it is detected whether or not the first movable accessory drive motor 90303 and the first movable accessory 90300 for driving the first movable accessory 90300 are located at the origin position. The first movable accessory origin detection sensor 90316 (photo sensor), the second movable accessory drive motor 90411, 90421, and the second movable accessory 90400 for driving the second movable accessory 90400 are located at the origin position. The second movable accessory origin detection sensors 90440A and 90440B (photosensors) for detecting whether or not the operation is performed, the third movable accessory drive motor 90520 for driving the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M A lever motor 9036 for operating the operating lever 9031 and a lever origin detection sensor 9038 (photosensor) for detecting whether or not the operating lever 9031 is located at the origin position are connected, and the first movable By controlling the operations of the accessory drive motor 90303, the second movable accessory drive motor 90411, 90421, the third movable accessory drive motor 90520, and the lever motor 9036, the first movable accessory 90300 and the second movable accessory are controlled. The operation of the 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031) can be individually controlled by the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120), and the first movable accessory can be controlled individually. The effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120) can detect whether or not the 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation lever 9031 are located at the origin position (initial position). It has become.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing various game-related effects such as variable display control of the effect symbol and advance notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. ing. As the advance notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 90120 during the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a big hit advance notice effect (including reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) suggesting the possibility of a big hit, and whether or not to reach. At the start of fluctuation display or when the reach is established, such as a suggestion reach notice, a stop symbol notice for notifying a stop symbol, and a latency notice for notifying whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is hidden). Includes multiple notices executed in. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 directs each movable body (first movable accessory 90300, second movable accessory 90400, third movable accessory 90500, operation module 90M) from the origin position in various effects including these advance notice effects. It is possible to perform a movable body effect that operates to a position or an operable position.

Here, the structures of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the third movable accessory 90500, which are movable bodies other than the operation module 90M, will be briefly described.

The first movable accessory 90300 is provided at a position below the effect display device 905 between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902, and is fixed at a predetermined position. The 90301, the first movable portion 90302 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion, the first retracted position (origin position, initial position) in which the first movable portion 90302 is tilted sideways, and the first retracted portion. It has a first effect position in which the first movable portion 90302 stands vertically at a position away from the above, and a first movable accessory drive motor 90303 that reciprocates (swings) between the first movable portion 90302. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the first movable accessory drive motor 90303.

A bearing hole through which the rotating shaft 90310 can be inserted is formed through the base portion 90301, and a guide groove having an arc shape centered on the bearing hole is formed around the bearing hole. There is. The first movable accessory drive motor 90303 is fixedly mounted on the back surface at the lower right position of the bearing hole on the back surface of the base portion 90301, and the tip of the drive shaft (not shown) that penetrates the base portion 90301 and protrudes to the front side. A turntable is fixed to the.

A shaft member facing in the front-rear direction is projected at a predetermined position on the peripheral edge of the turntable, and the lower end of the link member is rotatably supported by the shaft member. Further, a detected portion is projected on the opposite side of the shaft member at the peripheral edge of the rotating disk, and the detected portion is detected by the first movable accessory origin detection sensor 90316 provided below the rotating disk. As a result, the effect control CPU 90120 can identify that the first movable portion is located at the tilted position (origin position). That is, the first movable accessory 90300 is an operation target movable body that is the target of the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control described later.

In this embodiment, when the first movable portion 90302 is in the first retracted position tilted sideways, it retracts below the display screen of the effect display device 905 (see FIG. 50) and is in an upright state. At least a part of the display screen of the effect display device 905 is superimposed on the front side of the display screen at the first effect position away from the 1 retracted position.

The first movable portion 90302 is provided on a rotating member 90320 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion 90301, and the front portion can emit light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (not shown). The rotating member 90320 is composed of a substantially plate-shaped member extending in the left-right direction, and has a rotating shaft 90310 inserted into the bearing hole from the rear side and a guide groove projecting from the left side of the rotating shaft 90310 on the front right side. It has a first guide shaft inserted from the rear side, and a second guide shaft protruding from the upper right of the rotating shaft 90310 and inserted into the guide groove from the rear side.

The upper end of the link member is rotatably supported at the tip of the second guide shaft that protrudes toward the front surface side of the base portion 90301 through the guide groove. That is, the rotating disk and the rotating member 90320 are connected via a link member. Further, a coil spring is provided on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft 90310 to constantly urge the rotating member 90320 toward the first effect position side.

In the first movable accessory 90300 configured in this way, the first movable portion 90302 is located at the tilted position at the origin position (initial position). Then, the rotating disk is rotated clockwise by the first movable accessory drive motor 90303, and the second guide shaft is pulled downward by the link member, so that the front clock is centered on the rotating shaft 90310. It rotates about 90 degrees around, and the first movable portion 90302 rotates to the upright position, which is the first effect position. Since the urging force of the coil spring acts when rotating from the first retracted position to the first effect position, the load applied to the first movable accessory drive motor 90303 is reduced. Further, by reversely driving the first movable accessory drive motor 90303, the motor rotates from the first effect position to the first retracted position.

Further, when the first movable accessory 90300 moves to the first retracted position, the first guide shaft comes into contact with one end of the guide groove, so that the front view counterclockwise rotation of the first movable accessory 90300 is restricted. When the first movable accessory 90300 moves to the first effect position, the second guide shaft comes into contact with the other end of the guide groove, so that the clockwise rotation of the first movable accessory 90300 is restricted. It is supposed to be done.

Further, the second movable accessory 90400 has a second movable portion 90401 that extends in the left-right direction and is slightly shorter than the left-right dimension of the effect display device 905, and a vertical dimension of the effect display device 905 that extends in the vertical direction. It has a second movable portion 90402, which has substantially the same size as the above. The second movable portions 90401 and 90402 are provided between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905. Further, the second movable portion 90402 is provided at a position behind the second movable portion 90401. The second movable portion 90401 is a panel on which, for example, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed when it is in the second retracted position described later, and the second movable portion 90401 is located above the effect display device 905. A part of the logo panel 90450 is concealed by the logo panel 90450 provided in front of the 90401.

A rack gear facing in the vertical direction is fixed to the left end of the second movable portion 90401, and a pinion gear fixed to the drive shaft of the second movable accessory drive motor 90411 made of a stepping motor is meshed with the rack gear. ing. The second movable accessory drive motor 90411 is fixed to a base portion (not shown) provided on the left side of the effect display device 905. Further, the second movable portion 90401 is guided so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a guide member (not shown).

Therefore, the second movable unit 90401 uses the second movable accessory drive motor 90411 to display the second retracted position (origin position, initial position, position not overlapping with the effect display device 905) above the effect display device 905 and the effect display. A second effect position (a position that overlaps with the effect display device 905 and the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 are cross-shaped with each other) located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the device 905 and away from the second retract position. It is possible to move back and forth between the two.

Further, a detected portion is projected from the right end portion of the second movable portion 90401, and the detected portion is detected by the second movable accessory origin detection sensor 90440A provided on the base portion side. The effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the second movable portion 90401 is located at the second retracted position (origin position).

A rack gear facing in the left-right direction is fixed to the upper end of the second movable portion 90402, and a pinion gear fixed to the drive shaft of the second movable accessory drive motor 90421 composed of a stepping motor is meshed with the rack gear. ing. The second movable accessory drive motor 90421 is fixed to a base portion (not shown) at a substantially central position in the left-right direction above the effect display device 905. Further, the second movable portion 90402 is guided so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a guide member (not shown).

Therefore, the second movable portion 90402 is set to the second retracted position (origin position, initial position, position that does not overlap with the effect display device 905) on the left side of the effect display device 905 by the second movable accessory drive motor 90421. Left-right direction between the second effect position (position that overlaps with the effect display device 905 and the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 are cross-shaped with each other) arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in front of the display device 905. It is said that it can be moved back and forth.

Further, a detected portion is projected from the lower end portion of the second movable portion 90402, and the detected portion is detected by the second movable accessory origin detection sensor 90440B provided on the base portion side. The effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the second movable portion 90402 is located at the second retracted position (origin position). That is, the second movable accessory 90400 is an operation target movable body that is the target of the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control described later.

In the second movable accessory 90400 configured in this way, at the second retracted position (origin position, initial position), the second movable portion 90401 is above the effect display device 905, and the second movable unit 90402 is the effect display device 905. Located on the left side of. Then, the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 move to the second effect position overlapping with the effect display device 905 by driving the second movable accessory drive motors 90411 and 90421, and the second movable accessory drive motors 90411 and 90421 By reversely driving the 90421, it moves from the second effect position to the second retracted position.

Further, although the second movable accessory 90400 is not particularly shown, when the second movable accessory 90400 is moved to the second retracted position, the regulated portion of the second movable portion 90401, 90402 comes into contact with the regulated portion on the base portion side, so that the second movable accessory 90400 is second. The movement of the movable accessory 90400 in the direction of the second retracted position is restricted.

A part of the third movable accessory 90500 is superimposed on the effect display device 905 at the lower right position of the effect display device 905 between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902. It is provided to do so. The third movable accessory 90500 has a base portion having a circular shape in front view fixed at a predetermined position, a third movable portion rotatably provided with respect to the base portion, and a third movable portion in the front-rear direction. It has a third movable accessory drive motor 90520 that rotates (rotates) around a rotation axis that faces. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the third movable accessory drive motor 90520.

A third movable accessory drive motor 90520 is provided at a position above the rotation shaft on the back surface of the base portion, and a first gear is fixed to the tip of the drive shaft of the third movable accessory drive motor 90520. The second gear is meshed with the first gear, the third gear fixed to the rear end of the rotating shaft is meshed with the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the third movable accessory drive motor 90520. By doing so, the rotational force of the first gear is transmitted to the third movable portion via the second gear and the third gear, so that the third movable portion rotates forward or reverses about the rotation axis.

The third movable portion has a circular shape when viewed from the front, has a predetermined flower pattern on the front surface, and is provided so that the front surface can emit light by a built-in light emitting body (not shown). In this way, the third movable part has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the predetermined pattern has no particular upper and lower sides, and it only rotates about the rotation axis and does not move from the predetermined position. Not provided. Therefore, it is regarded as an operation non-target accessory that does not have an origin detection sensor that detects the origin position.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 57 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S9012). After that, a predetermined information output process is executed (S9013).

Next, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1'to MR4' by software is executed (S9014). After that, the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 58 is executed (S9015).

Following the special symbol process processing, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) is controlled to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and tilt the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The normal symbol process process for setting the operation and the like is executed (S9016). After that, by executing the command control process, the control command is transmitted (output) from the main board 9011 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (S9017).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, first, the start winning prize determination process is executed (S9021). After that, any of the processes S9022 to S9029 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152.

In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first starting port switch 9022A or the second starting port switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, the random number value MR1' , MR2', MR3' are extracted and stored at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit when the first start prize is won, and when the second start prize is given, the second start prize is stored. It is stored at the top level of the free entry in the special figure hold storage unit.

The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending data. Further, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1', it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Further, a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) is set according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process of S9023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a random value MR3'based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". Etc. are included. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". The special symbol change processing includes a process of setting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. When the change elapsed time of the special symbol reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S9025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". The special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It has been. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. Specifically, the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is set to "29 seconds", and the number of opening of the big winning opening, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set to "non-probable big hit" or "probable change". If it is a big hit A, it is set to "16 times". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the number of times the jackpot is opened, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set to "5". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The processing during the jackpot opening of S9027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. ..

The jackpot release post-processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending a jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed has elapsed. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot end processing, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit is read out, and whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B" is determined. Identify. Then, when it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not "non-probability variation jackpot", a setting (set of probability variation flag) for starting probability variation control is performed.

In addition, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the setting for starting the time reduction control (the set of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time reduction control are supported in advance. A predetermined count initial value (“100” in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. 59. In the main process, first, the first initialization process (S9050) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. , The second initialization process for returning to the origin position and confirming the operation of each movable body (first movable accessory 90300, second movable accessory 90400, third movable accessory 90500, operation module 90M) is performed. (S9051). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 90120 first performs a command analysis process (S9054). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 53) is the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. Then, a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command is performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the effect control process process (S9055). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 905 is executed.

Next, after executing the effect random number update process (S9056) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number, the sub-side error process (S9057) shown in FIG. 66 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to S9052.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S9051) of this embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 first identifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S90101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies, and in this embodiment, the order is as follows: first movable accessory 90300 → second movable accessory 90400 → operation module 90M → third movable accessory 90500. Is preset. Therefore, when S90101 is executed for the first time, the first movable accessory 90300 is specified as the target movable body. In the embodiment, the first movable accessory 90300 → the second movable accessory 90400 is operated with priority over the operation module 90M operated by the player, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the operation module 90M operated by the player may be set to operate with priority over the first movable accessory 90300 → the second movable accessory 90400 not operated by the player.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S90101 is an origin detection target movable body that needs to perform origin detection (S90102).

In this embodiment, as the origin detection target movable bodies for which it is necessary to perform origin detection, the first movable accessory 90300 having the first movable accessory origin detection sensor 90316 and the second movable accessory origin detection sensor 90440A, The second movable accessory 90400 having 90440B and the operation module 90M having the lever origin detection sensor 9038 correspond, and the third movable accessory 90500 not having the origin detection sensor does not correspond. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S90101 is any one of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module 90M, it is determined as "Y" in the determination, while being specified in S90101. If the movable body is the third movable accessory 90500, it will be determined as "N".

If it is determined to be "N" in S90102, the process proceeds to S90130. On the other hand, if it is determined to be "Y" in S90102, the process proceeds to S90103 to specify the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the movable body to be operated (S90103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S90104).

If it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S90104; N), the process proceeds to S90105, and after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control. (S90105), the operation target is the operation target at the same operation speed as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 62 and 63) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later as the control speed for operating the movable body. The minimum control speed for operating the movable body is set (S90106), and if the drive motor of the movable body to be operated, for example, the movable body to be operated is the first movable accessory 90300, the first movable accessory drive motor 90303 For example, if the operating target movable body is the operation module 90M, the lever motor 9036 is started to be driven in the origin position direction (S90107), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is set. Start (S90108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. ..

Then, at the same time as the origin detection sensor enters the detection state, the process shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the non-detection operation period timer reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit time (S90109, S90110).

By driving the drive device of the movable object to be operated (for example, the first movable accessory drive motor 90303, etc.) in the direction of the origin position, the movable object to be operated is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. When becomes, the drive of the drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S90130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S90112 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S90112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S90113).

When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90113, the drive of the drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored (S90114), and the process proceeds to S90130. .. That is, when the motion target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection motion control, the actual motion check motion control described later is not executed for the motion target movable body (corresponding to this). The origin return error is stored in order to put the movable body to be operated in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S90130.

In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90113, a mode in which the operation target movable body is in a dead-end state is illustrated. When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90113, the initialization error processing is started and the initialization error processing is executed. (2) By interrupting the initialization process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S9052, and the effect control board 9012 (such as the effect control CPU 90120) may be put into a non-startable state (dead end state). ..

Further, when the movable body to be operated is in the dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (such as the effect control CPU 90120) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is an input signal (for example, indicating that the movable body is operated). , The reception of the detection signal of the effect button and the like) is invalidated, and even if the input signal is input, it is preferable to execute a process such as preventing the movable body to be operated from operating.

On the other hand, if the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection has not reached the operation error determination count, the drive motor is stopped and returned to S90106, and the processing of S90106 to S90108 is performed again to move the operation target. Starts the operation of moving the body to the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation control at the time of non-detection), and shifts to the monitoring state of S90109 and S90110 described above. ..

Therefore, even if it is determined in S90110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (operation control at the time of non-detection) of repeatedly moving the operation target movable body to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the operation error determination number is reached. If the movable body to be operated is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S90130 without proceeding to S90114.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "Y" in S90104 and proceeds to S90120, the detection operation count counter is set to 0, the detection operation process data is set (S90121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. (S90121b). As the timer count of the detection operation process timer, the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number or the like. Further, in the detection operation process data of this embodiment, the minimum speed (FIG. 62, FIG. 62) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later as the control speed for operating the operation target movable body. The minimum control speed for operating the moving object to be operated at the same operating speed as (see 63) is described (set).

Next, the operating target movable body is operated based on the set minimum control speed set in the detected operation process data (S90122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S90123), and the process data If is not completed, the process returns to S90122, and the movable body to be operated is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

In this way, in the detection operation control, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initial) until the detection operation process data is completed. At the minimum speed in the conversion operation control), the operation of temporarily leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from the position away from the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 62). The position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where the detected portion of each movable body cannot be detected by each origin sensor, and a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. When operating position) is set.

If it is determined in the determination of S90123 that the set detection operation process data is completed, the drive of the movable accessory drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S90124 to see if the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position) is determined (confirmed).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be operated is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S90130.

On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be operated is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation count counter (S90126). , It is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S90127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection has reached the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S90128 to store the origin return error of the operation target movable body (S90128), and proceeds to S90130. That is, when the motion target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the motion control at the time of detection, the actual motion check motion control described later is not executed for the motion target movable body (the motion). The origin return error is stored in order to put the target movable body in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S90130.

In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90127, a mode in which the operation target movable body is in a dead-end state is illustrated. The second initial stage is not limited, and by starting the initialization error processing and executing the initialization error processing when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90113. By interrupting the conversion process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S9052, and the effect control board 9012 may not be started (dead end state).

Further, when the movable body to be operated is in the dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (such as the effect control CPU 90120) is activated. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body to be operated even if the input signal is input.

In S90130 to be executed when it is determined to be "N" in S90102, when it is determined to be "Y" in S90109, or when it is determined to be "Y" in S90124, it has not yet been targeted for operation among the movable bodies. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, when the moving target movable body is the third movable accessory 90500), it is shown in FIG. Move to the process of controlling the operation for checking the actual operation. On the other hand, when the remaining movable body exists, the process proceeds to S9011, the next movable body to be operated is specified, and then the return to S90102, and the above-mentioned processing after S90102 is performed on the specified movable body to be operated. Do the same.

When S90131 is executed when the movement target movable body is the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400 is specified as the movement target movable body based on the setting data, and the movement target movable body is specified. When S90131 is executed when is the second movable accessory 90400, the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031) is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is the operation module 90M. When S90131 is executed in the case of (operation lever 9031), the third movable accessory 90500 is specified as an operation target movable body based on the setting data.

Next, the process shown in FIG. 61 will be described. In S90200 shown in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 90120 first, like the above-mentioned S90101, is a movable body (confirmation target movable body) whose operation is first confirmed based on the setting data. (S90200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a memory of the origin return error of the target movable body (S90201).

If the origin return error of the movable body to be confirmed is stored, the process proceeds to S90220 without executing the processes S90202a to S90213. By doing so, in this embodiment, the operation control for confirming the actual operation is not performed for the movable body determined to have the origin return error in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

On the other hand, if there is no memory of the origin return error of the movable body to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S90202a and the process data for confirming the actual operation corresponding to the movable body to be confirmed is set. That is, if the movable body to be confirmed is the first movable accessory 90300, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the first movable accessory 90300 is set, and if the movable object to be confirmed is the second movable accessory 90400, the second is 2 Set the process data for confirming the actual operation of the movable accessory 90400, and if the movable body to be confirmed is the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), set the process data for confirming the actual operation of the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031). If the movable body to be confirmed is the third movable accessory 90500, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the third movable accessory 90500 is set. In each of these actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the actual operation in the movable body effect in the effect.

Next, the timer count of the actual operation confirmation process timer is started (S90202b). As the timer count of the process timer for checking the actual operation, a signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number of.

Then, in the set actual operation confirmation process data, the confirmation target movable body is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer (S2903), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S90204), and if the process data is not completed, the process returns to S90203 and the movable body to be confirmed is set according to the timer count value of the process timer for confirming the actual operation at that time. Operate based on the controlled speed.

In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the moving object to be confirmed is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. By doing so, the control speed of the movable body to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in chronological order to accelerate or decelerate the same as the control speed set when the movable body is actually operated in the movable body effect. it can.

Then, in the determination of S90204, when it is determined that the set actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the drive of the drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the confirmation target movable body is the origin detection target movable body. (S90204a). If the confirmation target movable body is not the origin detection target movable body, that is, if the third movable accessory 90500, the process proceeds to S90220. On the other hand, if the target accessory is the origin detection target movable body, that is, if the first movable accessory 90300 or the second movable accessory 90400, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S90205).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S90220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-mentioned non-detection operation control (see FIG. 60) is performed. The process of S90206 to S90213 is performed in order to position the movable body to be confirmed at the origin position (initial position).

Specifically, after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control (S90206), the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is used as the control speed. The minimum control speed for operating the operation target movable body at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in (S90207) is set, and the drive device of the confirmation target movable body, for example, the confirmation target movable body is the first movable accessory 90300. For example, the first movable accessory drive motor 90303 is started to be driven in the origin position (initial position) direction (S90208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S90209).

Then, at the same time as the origin detection sensor enters the detection state, the process shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S90210, S90211).

By driving the drive device of the movable body to be confirmed (for example, the first movable accessory drive motor 90303) in the direction of the origin position (initial position), the movable body to be confirmed is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor. Is in the detection state, it is determined as "Y" in S90210 and proceeds to S90220. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the movable body to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S90212 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S90212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S90213).

If the value of the non-detection operation count counter has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S90220. In this embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90213, a mode in which the operation target movable body is in a dead-end state is illustrated. When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S90213, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored, and the operation target movable body is subsequently described. May not perform the actual operation. Alternatively, by starting the initialization error processing and executing the initialization error processing, the second initialization processing is interrupted, so that the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S9052, and the effect control board 9012 May be set to a non-starting state (dead end state).

Further, when the movable body to be operated is in the dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (such as the effect control CPU 90120) is activated. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body to be operated even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the process returns to S90207 and the processes of S90207, S90208, and S90209 are performed again to confirm the actual operation of the movable body to be confirmed. The operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the state shifts to the monitoring state of S90210 and S90211 described above.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S90211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (operation control at the time of non-detection) of repeatedly moving the movable body to be confirmed to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the movable body to be confirmed is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S90220.

In S90220 to be executed when it is determined as "Y" in S90201, when it is determined as "N" in S90204a, when it is determined as "Y" in S90205, or when it is determined as "Y" in S90210. , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body among the movable bodies that has not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, the target accessory for operation confirmation is the first. In the case of 3 movable accessory 90500), the error record stored in S90114 or S90128 is cleared (S90222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining movable body exists, the process proceeds to S90221. Then, after specifying the movable body whose operation is to be confirmed, the process returns to S90201 and the above-described processing after S90201 is similarly executed for the specified target body.

Here, the operation mode and the control content of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 90120. In FIG. 63, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control during detection, and (C) is the control speed in the operation control during non-detection. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In FIGS. 62 and 63, the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module 90M, which are the movable bodies to be detected at the origin, perform non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) and detection. Only the operation control (short initialization operation control) and the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initialization operation control) will be described, and the description of the third movable accessory 90500 which is not the origin detection target movable body will be omitted. Further, the reciprocating operating distance (rotation range) of the first movable portion 90302 of the first movable accessory 90300 and the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) of the second movable portions 90401 and 90402 of the second movable accessory 90400 and the operation module, respectively. Although it is not the same as the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) of the 90M operating lever 9031, it will be described using the same conceptual diagram for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 62, the first movable portion 90302 of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable portions 90401 and 90402 of the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 of the operation module 90M are at the origin position (retracted position), respectively. , The initial position) and the effect position (operable position) are provided so that they can reciprocate, and the forward operation from the origin position to the effect position and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are the above-mentioned movable bodies. It is said to be the actual operation that is actually performed in the production.

In the effect control CPU 90120, when the detected portion of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the origin of the movable body is some reason (for example, when the movable body is transported or installed on a game island). If it has moved from the position, or if the origin cannot be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the origin return of the movable body cannot be confirmed or can be operated due to motor step-out, failure, catching, etc.) Corresponds to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 62 due to a position other than the origin position (for example, when a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as disappearance occurs) or when the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine. If it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by the black circle, the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection motion control is executed, since the movable body is located at a position away from the origin position, the motion is limited to the motion of moving the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the second initialization process, the first movable portion 90302 of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable portions 90401, 90402 of the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module 90M When the detected portion of the operation lever 9031 is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is executed.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period is determined between the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the movable body in the origin position direction is restricted. When the operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may be returned and the vehicle may stop at a position further backward from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable body to the more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor. Since it is not necessary to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operating position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 67A and 67B).

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control in the second initialization process. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed by the movable body in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 63 (A), 63 (B), and 63 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 90120 to operate each movable body, and are actual movements of the movable body. It is different from the operating speed of. That is, for example, in the case of operating a predetermined movable body, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section and another The movable body was actually operated when the mode was different between the moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when the moving section was raised and lowered even in the same moving section. The operating speed in the case may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, the actual operating speed of each movable body is not always the same. Not the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, etc. If there is a difference, the actual operating speeds of each movable body will not necessarily be the same.

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. Operate the movable body to be confirmed based on the set control speed. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the effect position. Let me. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body is controlled to operate at the speed within, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed are set. Control each movable body to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed or the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. To do.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body is ensured by controlling so as to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. After decelerating to, the origin detection sensor detects the detected part.

As shown in FIG. 63B, when executing the operation control at the time of detection, the effect control CPU 90120 always confirms the actual operation during the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, in the effect control CPU 90120, the maximum speed in the detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation confirmation). The moving body is always controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the operation control.

Further, in the case of the motion control at the time of detection, since the motion distance of the movable body is shorter than the motion control for the actual motion check, the origin detection is performed at the control speed when accelerated in the motion control for the actual motion check, that is, at a high speed. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged by the impact when the movable body returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted from a short distance. Control to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, in the effect control CPU 90120, the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the example, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Take control.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, the origin detection sensor could not reliably detect the detected part when the movable body returned to the origin position, or the movable body returned to the origin position from a short distance and movement was restricted. Since there is a risk that the movable body or the like may be damaged by the impact at that time, the operation is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is set. Based on this, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control corresponding to each movable body and are not the operation speeds common to each movable body, the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable portion 90302 of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable portions 90401 and 90402 of the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 of the operation module 90M are large as shown in FIG. Since the weight, operating mode, operating distance, and driving mechanism including the driving motor are different, the actual operating speed of the movable body is different even if the same control speed is set. Further, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies are different. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and in order to control the operation so as to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the movable body, a plurality of movable bodies having different modes are used. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S9055) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90120 first sets the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U of the effect display device 905 according to the storage contents of the hold storage buffer. The hold display update process for updating the display is executed (S9072).

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any of the processes S9073 to S9078 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern specification command is received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S9074).

Effect symbol variation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S9075).

Processing during effect symbol change (S9075): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S9076): Control to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S9077) or the variation pattern designation command reception wait process (S9073).

Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 905 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game in-game process (S9078).

Process during jackpot game (S9078): Control during jackpot game. For example, when a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S9079).

Big hit end effect processing (S9079): The effect display device 905 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

The effect control CPU 90120 is used for predetermined timing (for example, movable body effect) in the effect symbol variation processing (S9075), jackpot display process (S9077), jackpot game process (S9078), jackpot end effect process (S9079), and the like. It is possible to execute the movable body effect of moving the movable accessory between the origin position and the effect position) at the timing when the execution condition of is satisfied.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing during the effect symbol change of this embodiment. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer to -1 (S90301, S90302, S90303).

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (S90304). If the process timer is not out, the effect device (effect component) follows the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). ) Is executed (S90305).

On the other hand, if the process timer is out of timer, the process data is switched (S90306). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (S90307). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (S90308).

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the lever operation error flag or the overload error flag is set (S90309). If none of these error flags are set, it is determined based on the process data whether or not it is the lever protrusion processing execution timing for protruding the operating lever 9031 (S90310).

When the lever protrusion processing execution timing, that is, the period for executing the lever protrusion processing, the lever protrusion processing of S90311 is executed and the process proceeds to S90312, and if it is not the lever protrusion processing execution timing, the lever protrusion processing of S90311 is executed. Proceed to S90312 without proceeding. Therefore, when a predetermined timing is reached during the variation display of the effect symbol, the lever protrusion process is started, and the operation lever 9031 is displaced from the retracted state in which the tilt operation is not possible to the protrusion state in which the tilt operation is possible. (Operating lever effect) is executed.

Next, the operation guidance of the operation lever 9031, specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the lever operation guidance effect of displaying the image of the operation lever 9031 and the message of "close" on the effect display device 905. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing (S90312). If it is the execution timing of the lever operation guidance effect, the operation guidance effect process of S90313 is executed and the process proceeds to S90314. If it is not the execution timing of the lever operation guidance effect, the operation guidance effect process of S90313 is not executed. Proceed to S90314. The display of the lever operation guide is terminated when the execution period of the lever operation guide effect elapses in the operation guide effect process.

In S90314, it is determined whether or not the operation lever 9031 has been tilted depending on whether or not the detection signal is input from the lever operation detection sensor 9035A. When the operation lever 9031 is tilted, it is further determined whether or not the operation lever 9031 is in the operation valid period, and when the operation lever 9031 is in the operation valid period, the special effect processing of S90316 is performed. By executing this, a special effect, specifically, a win / loss notification effect (see FIG. 69 (E) or FIG. 69 (F)) for notifying the victory / defeat in the battle effect is executed. If the operation lever 9031 is not in the operation valid period, it is determined as "N" in S90315 and the process proceeds to S320.

On the other hand, when there is no tilting operation of the operation lever 9031, it is determined whether or not the special effect has already been executed (including during execution) (S90317), and if the special effect has not been executed, it must be in the state of being executed. Further, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the operation valid period of the operation lever 9031 (S90318). Then, when it is the end timing of the operation valid period of the operation lever 9031, by executing the special effect processing of S90316, the operation can be performed even if the operation lever 9031 is not tilted during the operation valid period of the operation lever 9031. At the end timing of the valid period, the special effect is executed assuming that the operation lever 9031 has been tilted.

If it is determined as "Y" in S90317 due to the state in which the special effect is executed, or if it is determined as "N" in S90318 because it is not the end timing of the lever operation valid period, the process proceeds to S90320.

Although not shown in FIG. 65, once the special effect processing of S90316 is executed, the special effect executing flag indicating that the special effect process is being executed is special. By being set until the end of the effect, the special effect process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs until the end of the special effect.

In S90320, it is determined based on the process data whether or not it is the lever storage process execution timing for storing the operation lever 9031 (S90320).

When the lever storage process execution timing, that is, the period during which the lever storage process is executed, it is further determined whether or not the lever operation error flag is set. If the lever operation error flag is set, the process proceeds to S90330 without executing the lever storage process of S90323. On the other hand, when the lever operation error flag is not set, whether or not the operation lever 9031 is tilted, that is, whether or not the tilting operation of the operating lever 9031 is continued even during the period for storing the operating lever 9031. (S90322). When the tilting operation of the operation lever 9031 is continued, the operation lever 9031 cannot be stored. Therefore, the process proceeds to S90325, a lever operation error is determined, a lever operation error flag is set, and then the lever of S90323 is set. Proceed to S90330 without executing the storage process.

On the other hand, if it is determined as "N" in S90322 because there is no tilting operation of the operating lever 9031, that is, if the tilting operation is completed before the period for storing the operating lever 9031 is reached, the lever is used. By operating the motor 9036 to displace the operating lever 9031 from the operable position (protruding position) to the origin position (storage position) and execute the lever retracting process, the operating lever 9031 cannot be operated at the origin position (the origin position (retracting position). An effect (operation lever effect) that displaces to the storage position) is executed (S90323).

When this lever retracting process is executed, it is always determined (monitored) in S90324 whether or not the lever motor 9036 is overloaded. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation lever 9031 cannot be stowed due to the player's hand, mobile phone, foreign matter such as a game ball, etc. being caught, and the lever motor 9036 becomes overloaded. If so, the process proceeds to S90326, and the drive by the lever motor 9036 is stopped to prevent the lever motor 9036 from failing or the operation lever 9031 or the like from being damaged, and it is determined that an overload error occurs and the overload is overloaded. Set the error flag (S90327).

When returning to S90309 and determining "Y" in S90309, that is, when either the lever operation error flag or the overload error flag is set, the process proceeds to S90340 and the operation of the operation lever 9031 is valid. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the period, and if it is not the end timing of the operation valid period of the operation lever 9031, the process proceeds to S90330, while if it is the end timing of the operation valid period of the operation lever 9031, S90341 The special effect processing of is executed and the process proceeds to S90330. As a result, the lever protrusion process of S90311, the operation guidance effect process of S90313, and the lever storage process of S90323 are not executed. Therefore, if either the lever operation error flag or the overload error flag is set, the operation is performed. Neither the operation lever effect in which the lever 9031 protrudes and retracts nor the operation promotion effect in which the operation lever 9031 is tilted is executed. In this way, when the lever operation error flag or the overload error flag is set, that is, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation lever 9031, the effect using the operation lever 9031 is not executed. It is possible to prevent improper production from being executed.

In S90330, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer is timer-out (S90330). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (S90330; Y), the effect control CPU 90120 is displayed on the next display screen of the left, middle, and right effect symbols (30 ms after the previous display switching time of the effect symbol). The image data of the screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (S90331). In this way, the effect display device 905 realizes fluctuation control of the effect symbol. The display control unit 90123 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 905. Output. In this way, the effect display device 905 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (S90332).

If the fluctuation control timer is not timered out (S90330; N), after the execution of S90332, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timered out (S90333). If the fluctuation time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076) (S90335). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S90334; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing ( The value is updated according to S9076) (S90335). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timered out, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the process data during the variation display of the effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of S90334 timers out, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. To do.

Next, the sub-side error processing executed by the effect control CPU 90120 in S9057 of the main processing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 66.

In the sub-side error processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the lever operation error flag is set (S90401).

If the lever operation error flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90404. On the other hand, when the lever operation error flag is set, the lever operation error display, specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), "An error has occurred !! Please take your hand off the operation lever." Judges whether or not the message display of is being displayed.

If the lever operation error display is displayed, proceed to S90404. If the lever operation error display is not displayed, proceed to S90403 and release the above-mentioned "Error occurred !! Operation lever". The lever operation error display including the message display of "" is started in the effect display device 5, and the process proceeds to S90404. Therefore, if the lever operation error flag is set by continuing the tilting operation of the operation lever 9031, which is the operation guided to the player, an error message is displayed on the effect display device 905. However, no error sounds are output, and even though the guided operation is executed, a noisy error notification is executed in which the surrounding players recognize the occurrence of the error, and the game is played. It is designed to prevent people from being uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in S90404, it is determined whether or not the overload error flag is set. If the overload error flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90407. On the other hand, when the overload error flag is set, as shown in FIG. 68B, it is determined whether or not the overload error display and the output of the error sound are being executed.

If the overload error display and the output of the error sound are being executed, the process proceeds to S90407, and if the overload error display and the output of the error sound are not being executed, as shown in FIG. 68 (b). The overload error display consisting of the message "Error occurred !! Please remove foreign matter from the operation lever" is started on the effect display device 905, and the output of the error sound from the speakers 908L and 908R is started on S90407. move on. In the state where the overload error occurs in this way, that is, in the state where a foreign object such as a player's hand, a mobile phone, or a game ball is caught, the error is not due to the operation guided to the player. Compared to the case of a lever operation error, a noisy (exaggerated) error notification that can be easily recognized by the surrounding clerk etc. is executed to notify the occurrence of the error, and the player intentionally pinches a foreign object or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent mischief such as pulling the operation lever 9031 while being displaced to the storage position.

That is, the mode of error notification in the case of a lever operation error is a mode in which the ease of recognition (recognition degree (level)) is low, and the mode of error notification in the case of an overload error is the mode of ease of recognition (recognition). The mode may have a high degree (level), but the present invention is not limited to this, and an object of the present invention is only to make it possible to distinguish between a lever operation error and an overload error. In the case, conversely, the mode of error notification in the case of a lever operation error is set to a mode in which the ease of recognition (recognition degree (level)) is high, and the mode of error notification in the case of an overload error is recognized. The mode may have a low degree of ease (recognition degree (level)).

In S90407, it is determined whether or not other error flags are set. If no other error flag is set, the process proceeds to S90410. On the other hand, when other error flags are set, it is determined whether or not the error notification corresponding to the error flag is being executed.

If the error notification corresponding to the error flag is being executed, the process proceeds to S90410, and if the error notification corresponding to the error flag is not being executed, the error notification corresponding to the error flag is started.

Further, in S90410, it is determined whether or not the lever operation error display or the overload error display is being displayed.

If the lever operation error display or the overload error display is not displayed, the process proceeds to S90413, and if the lever operation error display or the overload error display is displayed, the process proceeds to S9041 and the lever origin detection sensor 9038 moves. It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the operation lever 9031 has been returned to the origin position by a clerk of the amusement park or the like after the occurrence of the error.

If the lever origin detection sensor 9038 is not ON, that is, if the operating lever 9031 is not returned to the origin position, the process proceeds to S90413. On the other hand, when the lever origin detection sensor 9038 is ON, the process proceeds to S90412, and when the lever operation error flag is set, the lever operation error flag is cleared and the lever operation error display on the effect display device 905 is displayed. If the overload error flag is set, the overload error flag is cleared and the overload error display and the output of the error sound in the effect display device 905 are terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, a mode in which the lever operation error display and the overload error display are displayed until the operation lever 9031 is returned to the origin position and the lever operation error flag and the overload error flag are cleared is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lever operation error display and the overload error display may be displayed for a certain period of time. In this case, the lever operation error display ends after a lapse of a predetermined period, but the overload error display may be continuously displayed until the operation lever 9031 is returned to the origin position, or the lever operation error display may be displayed. The display period may be shorter than the overload error display period.

Further, in S90413, it is determined whether or not other errors are being notified, and if other errors are not being notified, the sub-side error processing is terminated. On the other hand, if other errors are being notified, the process proceeds to S90414 to determine whether or not the error being notified has been resolved, and if not, the sub-side error processing is terminated. ..

If the error being notified has been resolved, the process proceeds to S90415 to clear the error flag of the error being notified, and after the error notification is terminated, the sub-side error processing is terminated.

Here, FIGS. 67 and 69 show the relationship between the error notification and the state of the operation lever 9031 due to the execution of the sub-side error processing shown in FIG. 66 and the effect symbol changing processing shown in FIG. 65 described above. It will be described using. Note that FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a situation when a lever operation error occurs, and FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a situation when an overload error occurs.

In this embodiment, the operation lever effect in which the operation lever 9031 is in the protruding state is executed because the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined as the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 69 (A). ), A super reach effect, specifically, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character play against each other is executed (FIGS. 69 (B) and 69 (C)). Then, when the lever protrusion processing execution timing comes at a predetermined time after the battle effect is started, the operation lever effect in which the operation lever 9031 protrudes (displaces) is started, and the operation lever 9031 is stored (origin position). Displaces from to the operable position (effect position). Then, after the operation lever 9031 is displaced to the operable position (effect position), as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the lever 9031 image and the message "close!" Are displayed on the effect display device 905. The operation guidance effect is executed.

When the player performs a tilting operation of pulling the operation lever 9031 toward himself / herself in response to the guidance of the lever operation guidance effect, the win / loss notification effect of notifying the victory or defeat in the battle effect is performed according to the tilting operation. (See FIG. 69 (E) or FIG. 69 (F)) is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot effect symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display and controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the winning or losing of the mode in which the ally character wins the battle. While the notification effect is executed, if the out-of-order effect symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display and is not controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the ally character loses the battle. Win / loss notification effect is executed.

When the lever storage process execution timing comes at a predetermined time after the victory / defeat notification effect is executed, the lever storage process described above is executed, and the operation lever effect in which the operation lever 9031 is displaced to the storage position (origin position) is generated. Although it should be executed, if the player keeps pulling the operation lever 9031 even when the lever storage process is executed, it is determined as a lever operation error as shown in FIG. 67 (a). When the lever operation error flag is set, the lever operation error display is displayed on the effect display device 905. However, no error sound is output.

On the other hand, when the lever storage process execution timing is reached, if the player has not tilted the operation lever 9031, the lever storage process described above is started and the operation lever 9031 is moved to the storage position (origin position). ). However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68B, a foreign object such as a player's mobile phone 90P is caught between the upper surface of the bulging portion 9030 and the operation lever 9031, and the lever motor 9036 is overloaded. When the state is reached, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), an overload error is determined, the drive of the lever motor 9036 is stopped, and the overload error flag is set to display the effect. An overload error display is displayed and an error sound is output in the device 905.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 as an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 67, the operating lever 9031, which is a movable body, is guided in a state where it is not driven by the lever motor 9036. In the case of a lever operation error, which is an error when the performed operation is continued, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), an abnormality notification is executed by an error display without an error sound output, and the operation lever 9031 is executed. In the case of an overload error, which is an error caused by an operation other than the guided operation or a foreign object while the lever is being driven by the lever motor 9036, an error sound is output as shown in FIG. 68 (b). Since the abnormality notification is executed by the error display accompanied by, the status of the operating lever 9031 which is a movable body, specifically, whether or not it is being displaced by being driven by the lever motor 9036 and the cause of the error are guided. It is possible to notify an abnormality depending on whether or not the operation is continued.

Further, according to the above embodiment, even if the operating lever 9031 is displaced to the retracted position (origin position) and the player mistakenly operates the operating lever 9036 to overload the lever motor 9036, an overload error occurs. Since it is determined and the abnormality notification is executed by the error display accompanied by the output of the error sound shown in FIG. 68B, even if the operation of the operating lever 9031 which is a movable body is hindered by an erroneous operation by the player or the like. It is possible to perform abnormality notification according to the situation of the operation lever 9031.

Further, according to the above embodiment, not only the mode of the display message is different but also the presence / absence of the output of the error sound is different as the notification mode of the abnormality notification in the case of the lever operation error and the abnormality notification in the case of the overload error. Therefore, since it is possible to easily recognize the difference in the mode of abnormality notification, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the above embodiment, when an overload error occurs, the operation (drive) of the lever motor 9036 is stopped, so that it is possible to prevent the lever motor 9036 from failing or the operating lever 9031 from being damaged. it can.

Further, according to the above embodiment, when an operation lever error or an overload error occurs and the operation lever error flag or the overload error flag is set, the operation lever 9031 is in a protruding state in which the operation lever 9031 can be tilted and operated. Since the operating lever effect to be displaced is not executed, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate operation lever effect from being executed by performing the operation lever effect in a state where an abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the above embodiment, there are a first retracted position in which the first movable portion 90302 tilts sideways and a first effect position in which the first movable portion 90302 stands upright in a position away from the first retracted position. The first movable accessory 90300 rotatably provided between them, the second retracted position (origin position, initial position) retracted to the side of the effect display device 905, and the abbreviation of the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905. The second movable accessory 90400, which is arranged at the center position and is provided so as to be reciprocally movable between the second effect position and the second effect position away from the second retract position, and the storage position (origin position) and the operable position (effect position). An operation module 90M displaceable between the two, a first movable accessory drive motor 90303 as a drive means for operating a movable body, a second movable accessory drive motor 90411, 90421, and a lever motor 9036. , The first movable accessory drive motor 90303, the second movable accessory drive motor 90411, 90421, and the effect control CPU 90120 as a control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the lever motor 9036, and the effect control CPU 90120. Is the first motion control of non-detection motion control and detection motion control, and the second motion control of actual motion confirmation to confirm that the movable body can operate normally, and movable. It is possible to execute the third motion control for producing the movable body effect by the body, and when the motion control for confirming the actual motion is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. When controlling the movable body to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed and executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, the actual operation confirmation as the second operation control The movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control.

By doing so, in the first motion control, the movable body operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position. Specifically, in the non-detection motion control and the detection motion control, the distance for moving the movable body to the origin position may be shorter than the actual motion confirmation motion control, so that the non-detection motion control or the detection motion control may be performed. By setting the maximum speed in the operation control as the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, the detected part can be reliably detected by the detecting means, and the movement of the movable body is restricted while moving at high speed. It is possible to avoid damage due to impact.

When the motion control during non-detection or the motion control during detection is executed, when the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the motion control for actual operation confirmation, the motion control during non-detection or the motion control during detection The control speed set when executing the operation control and the minimum control speed set in the operation control for confirming the actual operation may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, it always reaches a preset single (constant) operation speed, that is, always the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The first movable accessory 90300 and the second movable accessory 90400 are controlled to operate.

By doing so, the speed at which the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 are positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and the first movable accessory 90300 or the second movable accessory 90300 or the second It is possible to prevent damage to the movable accessory 90400 and the operation lever 9031.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the first movable accessory 90300 or the second movable accessory 90300 or the second movable accessory is at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control the object 90400 to operate.

By doing so, the speed is excessively reduced while ensuring the safe operation of the first movable accessory 90300 and the second movable accessory 90400 (for example, the speed is slower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). By selecting the maximum speed (first speed) that allows safe operation without any trouble, the period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control can be shortened.

Further, the first movable accessory origin detection sensor 90316 and the second movable accessory as detection means capable of detecting that the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 are located at the origin position. The object origin detection sensors 90440A and 90440B and the lever origin detection sensor 9038 are provided, and the effect control CPU 90120 controls the non-detection operation of S90105 to S90114 when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in S90104 in the second initialization process. When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state in S90104, the motion control during detection of S90120 to S90128 is executed, and when the motion control during non-detection is executed, the movable body moves at the lowest speed in the motion control during detection. Control to work.

By doing so, the presence or absence of defects in the first movable accessory origin detection sensor 90316, the second movable accessory origin detection sensor 90440A, 90440B, and the lever origin detection sensor 9038 by the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control. Can also be grasped. Further, when the non-detection motion control is executed, it is unknown whether or not the movable body is near the origin position, whereas when the detection motion control is executed, the movable body is at the origin position. Therefore, in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation may be performed at a speed faster than the operation control at the time of non-detection and at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

Further, in the effect control CPU 90120, when a specific abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality generated at the time of executing the effect) has occurred, the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S90109 in the second initialization process. , The first movable accessory 90300 and the second movable accessory 90400 are controlled to move toward the origin position at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation until the number of operation error determinations reaches "3". ..

By doing so, even in the abnormal operation that is executed when a specific abnormality (for example, an error such as an operation abnormality that occurred during the execution of the effect) has occurred, the first movable accessory 90300 or the second movable accessory 90300 or the second The movable accessory 90400 and the operation lever 9031 can be safely operated. Specifically, for example, when an operation abnormality occurs during the execution of the effect, and then the second initialization process is performed, the movable body has not returned to the origin position, so that the operation control at the time of non-detection is executed. Will be done. Further, when an operation abnormality occurs, it is considered that the movable body does not operate even in the second initialization process. Therefore, as an operation at the time of abnormality, the first movable accessory 90300 or the first movable accessory 90300 or the first at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. 2 The movable accessory 90400 is controlled to move toward the origin position.

Further, if the effect control CPU 90120 has a memory of the origin return error of the target accessory in step S90201 in the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to S90220 and does not perform the actual operation confirmation operation control.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 from stopping at a position other than the origin position during the actual operation confirmation operation control due to an abnormality. Specifically, for example, if an operation abnormality occurs during the execution of the effect, it is possible that the movable body does not operate even in the second initialization process. In that case, even if the operation control for checking the actual operation is executed. It is preferable not to execute the operation control for confirming the actual operation because the drive means is simply loaded and wasted.

Further, it has a first movable accessory 90300 as a first movable body, a second movable accessory 90400, an operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), and a third movable accessory 90500 as a second movable body. When the control CPU 90120 determines in step S90102 in the second initialization process that the movable body is an origin detection target movable body for which it is necessary to perform origin detection, the control CPU 90120 actually performs non-detection operation control or detection operation control. While executing the operation check operation control, if it is determined in step S90102 that the movable body is not the origin detection target movable body for which it is necessary to detect the origin, the process proceeds to step S90130 and the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are performed. And do not do.

By doing so, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation for actual operation confirmation only for the necessary movable body, and it is possible to shorten the operation confirmation time by the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

Further, it has a first movable accessory 90300 as a first movable body, a second movable accessory 90400, an operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), and a third movable accessory 90500 as a second movable body. When the control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation of each of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in each actual operation confirmation operation control, and the operation speeds of the actual operation confirmation operation control are the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module. Make it different from 90M (operation lever 9031).

By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control while ensuring the safe operation of each movable body at the operation speed corresponding to each movable body. For example, even if the same control speed is set in the operation control for confirming the actual operation of the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), the size of each movable body is large. If there are differences in weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speed of each movable body when the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are executed will be different.

Specifically, even when the same control speed (minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control) is set in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the weight of the plurality of movable bodies The actual operating speed of a movable body with a large weight is slower than the actual operating speed of a movable body with a small weight. Further, when the movable body is raised, the actual operating speed is slower than when the movable body is lowered. In addition, when a spring or the like for urging the movable part in the effect direction is provided as a drive mechanism, when the spring is moved in a direction opposite to the urging force while the spring is contracted, the urging force is extended while the spring is extended. The actual operating speed will be slower than when moving in a direction that opposes. In this way, in the non-detection motion control and the detection motion control, when the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual motion confirmation motion control, the size of each movable body, It is preferable to set an individual minimum control speed in each operation control for confirming actual operation in consideration of weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, and the like.

For example, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged in the front-rear direction so that the second movable portion overlaps the front side of the first movable portion when viewed from the player when moving toward the origin position. When any of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is performed together. It is preferable to control so that the operating speeds (minimum speeds) of the 1 movable portion and the 2nd movable portion are different. By doing so, the power is turned on with the first movable portion and the second movable portion moved to positions distant from the origin position for some reason, and in the second initialization process of S9051. When the non-detection operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is executed together, the operation speed (minimum speed) of both the first movable part and the second movable part is controlled to be the same. Then, the situation where the first movable part is hidden by the second movable part and moves to the origin position becomes difficult to see, but by controlling the minimum speeds of the first movable part and the second movable part to be different, the first Since the movable portion and the second movable portion are displaced when they move, it becomes easy to confirm the origin return operation of each of the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

Further, even when the first movable portion and the second movable portion larger (or longer) than the first movable portion are provided, the operating speeds (minimum speeds) of the first movable portion and the second movable portion are different. It is preferable to control the speed. By doing so, for example, the minimum in any of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the first movable part, which is smaller (or shorter) than the second movable part and is inconspicuous. By making the speed slower than the minimum speed in any of the non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control of the second movable part, which is conspicuous because the speed is larger (or longer) than the first movable part. , It becomes easy to confirm the operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

In this way, when the first movable portion and the second movable portion different from the first movable portion are provided, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are respectively undetected motion control, detection motion control, and actual. It is preferable to control the operation speed (minimum speed) in the operation check operation control so as to be different. When the operation speeds (minimum speeds) of the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled to be different in this way, the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control at the time of detection of the first movable part and the second movable part, respectively. And the minimum control speed set in the operation control for confirming the actual operation may be different or may be the same.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the effect suggesting that the operation lever effect is executed is not executed before the operation lever effect in which the operation lever 9031 is displaced to the operable position is executed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 70, an effect suggesting that the operation lever effect is executed may be executed.

Specifically, for example, the execution of the victory / defeat notification effect described above can be executed not only by the operation of the operation lever 9031 but also by the operation of the push button 9031A, and the operation of the operation lever 9031 is guided to guide the operation lever 9031. When the winning / losing notification effect is executed by operating the push button 9031A, the operation of the push button 9031A is guided, and the winning / losing notification effect in which the ally wins is compared with the case where the winning / losing notification effect is executed by operating the push button 9031A. By deciding the execution of each effect so that the ratio of the jackpot symbol being derived and displayed is high, the operation of the operation lever 9031 becomes a jackpot more than the operation of the push button 9031A. A case where the operation of the operation lever 9031 is more advantageous for the player because it is easy will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

First, after the left and right effect symbols are stopped and a reach state is generated (FIG. 70 (A)), when the battle effect is started, for example, as an image related to the operation, a "push button" suggesting the operation of the push button 9031A. The image of "9031A" is displayed on the effect display device 905 (FIG. 70 (B)).

Then, during the execution of the battle effect, which is a super reach effect, a character that fires a bullet acting on the "push button 9031A" appears, and the effect of firing the bullet (action effect) is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the effect of firing a bullet (action effect) may be such that the bullet does not hit the image of the "push button 9031A", or as shown in FIG. 70 (D). The bullet may hit the image of "push button 9031A" and the bullet is fired up to twice. Although not illustrated in FIG. 70, the first bullet fired may hit the image of "push button 9031A", or both shots may not hit the image of "push button 9031A". .. If neither of the two shots hits the image of the "push button 9031A", the display of the "push button 9031A" is continued, so that the operation of the push button 9031A is guided when the winning / losing notification effect is executed.

When any bullet fired by the character hits the image of "push button 9031A", as shown in FIG. 70 (E), instead of the image of "push button 9031A", "smoke screen" is used as an intermediate image. After the image of "" is displayed, an image of the state in which the operation lever 9031 is projected is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (F). By suggesting that the operation lever effect in which the operation lever 9031 protrudes (displaces) to the operable position is executed when the victory / defeat notification effect is executed, the player's expectation of becoming a big hit is effective. It becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by raising the target, and by executing the action effect of firing a bullet to hit it, the image can be changed to a state in which the operation lever 9031, which is advantageous for the player, is protruding. Since it is easy to understand, it is possible to improve the effect of displaying the image of the operation lever 9031 for increasing the expectation of the player.

That is, in the modified example shown in FIG. 70, a specific display such as an image of the push button 9031A capable of detecting the operation (operation) of the player, an image of the "push button 9031A" corresponding to the operation lever 9031, or an image of the "operation lever 9031" is displayed. Is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 905 by the effect control CPU 90120, and as a specific display, the image of the "push button 9031A" which is the first specific display and the image of the "push button 9031A" are more advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the image of the "operation lever 9031" which is the second specific display with a high value, and after displaying the image of the "push button 9031A", it is fired as an action effect acting on the image of the "push button 9031A". It is possible to display the image of the "operation lever 9031" which is the second specific display by executing the effect of hitting the bullet.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 70, the image of the "push button 9031A" which is the first specific display is changed only to the image of the "operation lever 9031" which is the second specific display which is highly advantageous for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the first change pattern in which the image of the “push button 9031A” changes to the image of the “operation lever 9031”, the “push button 9031A” is illustrated. Is an image similar to the image of the "push button 9031A", and the advantage for the player is higher than that of the image of the "push button 9031A" due to the difference in color and size, but the "operation lever 9031" By having a second change pattern that changes to an image lower than the image of (third specific display), the player can pay attention to whether the image changes to the second specific display or the third specific display. May be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which the target for performing the abnormality notification in different modes is an operation lever 9031 that can be operated (contacted) by the player, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a movable body other than these operation levers, for example, an effect button that is displaced from the normal storage position to a protruding position, a game in an upper position or a side position of the pachinko game machine 901, and a game in front of the pachinko game machine 901. It may be a movable body such as an accessory (gimmick) provided so that a person can contact or operate it, and these movable bodies may be not one but a plurality.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the first notification mode, only the error display is displayed on the effect display device 905, and as the second notification mode, the error display is displayed on the effect display device 905 and the error sound is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error display may not be executed in the first notification mode, and the error display may be executed in the second notification mode. As a notification mode, an error is displayed on the effect display device 905 and the operation lever 9031 is vibrated to notify the error, and as a second notification mode, an error is displayed on the effect display device 905 and the operation lever 9031 is vibrated. Further, an error sound is output, or as a second notification mode, an error is displayed on the effect display device 905, and the lighting mode of the effect LED 909 is set to a lighting mode at the time of abnormality (for example, blinking red), and an error sound is further set. The first notification mode and the second notification mode may be appropriately determined as long as the difference between the modes can be recognized. That is, the "different mode of abnormality notification" in the present invention includes a mode in which notification is not executed as one mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a method of limiting the execution of the operation lever effect that is the movable body effect, a mode in which the lever protrusion process or the like, which is a process corresponding to the operation lever effect, is not executed has been exemplified. When the abnormality notification is executed, the abnormality notification is limited by not determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach that accompanies the execution of these operation lever effects, or the abnormality notification is performed. If the fluctuation pattern of the super reach that accompanies the execution of the operation lever effect is determined when it is being executed, the effect is changed so that the effect is different from the battle effect that accompanies the execution of the operation lever effect. It may be limited by, and the method of limiting these may be appropriately determined according to the storage capacity of the memory to be used and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which the same limitation is applied in the case of the operation lever error and the case of the overload error is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation lever error. In the case of, the operation lever error and the overload error are executed, such as executing an effect different from the battle effect that involves the execution of the operation lever effect, and not executing the effect in the case of an overload error. The restrictions may be different depending on the case of.

Further, in the above embodiment, a form in which a push button 9031A or an operation lever 9031 is provided as a detection means for detecting a player's movement is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, An infrared sensor, an image sensor, or the like may be used to detect the presence or absence of a player's movement such as holding a hand.

Further, in the above-described modification, a mode in which different operations are performed as an operation of the “push button 9031A” and an operation of the “operation lever 9031” has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the above description is given. As described above, when an infrared sensor, an image sensor, or the like is used, for example, different operations may be an operation (operation) of the "push button 9031A" and an operation (operation) using the infrared sensor, the image sensor, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), a mode of executing an operation guidance effect for guiding the operation of the operation lever 9031 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. , These operation guidance effects may not be executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the mode in which the error notification (abnormality notification) is continued until the operation lever 9031 is returned to the origin position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined one. The error notification (abnormality notification) may be terminated with the passage of time, or the error notification (abnormality notification) may be terminated when the operation lever 9031 is operated for the first time after the error notification (abnormality notification).

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the movable body, the first movable accessory 90300 that can rotate between the origin position and the effect position and the second movable object that can move linearly between the origin position and the effect position. An example is illustrated in which an operation module 90M having an accessory 90400, a third movable accessory 90500 that can rotate about a rotation axis, and an operation lever 9031 that can be operated by a player is applied, but the present invention is limited thereto. The operation mode (for example, the moving direction and the rotating direction) and the number of installations of these movable accessories are not limited to those described above, and can be changed in various ways. Further, a movable body that operates in an operation mode other than the above may be applied.

Further, in the above embodiment, the operation module 90M having the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, and the operation lever 9031 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position is applied as the origin detection target movable body. , The embodiment in which the third movable accessory 90500 is applied as the origin non-target accessory is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third movable accessory that does not operate between the origin position and the effect position. Even in a movable accessory such as 90500, the origin detection target movable body may be set by setting the origin position at the rotation position of the third movable portion 90502.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the second initialization process, a mode in which non-detection-time motion control or detection-time motion control as the first motion control is executed for one movable accessory has been illustrated. The invention is not limited to, and at least the operation control at the time of non-detection may be executed. When only the non-detection operation control can be executed, the non-detection operation control does not have to be executed when the moving accessory is detected by the origin detection sensor in the second initialization process.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control is used. Although a mode of controlling the movable accessory to operate at the same speed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the actual second operation control is performed. It suffices to control the movable accessory to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation check operation control. For example, the movable accessory operates at a speed slower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. It may be controlled to.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control which is the first operation control, it is always movable at a single operation speed (minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation) set in advance. Although the embodiment in which the accessory is operated, that is, the movable accessory is controlled to always operate at a constant speed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when returning to the origin position. In addition, the speed may be gradually reduced from the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation so as to operate at a speed lower than the minimum speed. That is, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, which is the first operation control, if the speed is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, the speed is changed in a predetermined movement period. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, which is the first operation control, the operation of the movable accessory is performed at the same operation speed (minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Although the mode of control has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control is controlled to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the detection operation control. For example, the movable accessory may be operated at different operating speeds between the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a specific abnormality such as an error has occurred and the movable accessory is not detected by the detection means, that is, the origin detection sensor detects it in step S90109 in the second initialization process. If it is not in the state, control to move the first movable accessory 90300 and the second movable accessory 90400 toward the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation until the number of operation error determinations reaches "3". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the speed is lower than the minimum speed in the operation control at the time of detection, for example, at a low speed set for an error and a relatively large torque can be obtained. The movable accessory may be controlled to operate at a certain special speed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S90124 in the second initialization process, that is, when the movable body to be operated is not located at the origin position (initial position). , The processing of S90122 to S90127 is repeated until the origin detection sensor reaches the detection state, that is, the movable accessory is based on the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation based on the set process data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S90124 in the second initialization process, it is at that time. The non-detection motion control for moving the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position may be executed based on the minimum control speed set in the motion control for confirming the actual motion.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031) are provided as a plurality of movable bodies, and in the second initialization process. As movable bodies to be executed for non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control, the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the third movable accessory 90500, and the operation An embodiment in which the module 90M (operation lever 9031) is applied has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second initialization process, non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation The movable accessory to be controlled includes one movable object such as the first movable accessory 90300, the second movable accessory 90400, the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031), and the third movable accessory 90500. For example, when one movable body has a plurality of movable parts (for example, the second movable accessory 90400 has a second movable part 90401 and a second movable part 90402), these are not limited to the above. Each moving part is targeted for execution of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control, and each movable part is sequentially subjected to non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control. You may do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation control for confirming the actual operation in the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 accelerates and decelerates the movable accessory in the forward operation and the return operation, respectively, from low speed to high speed to low speed. Although the mode of controlling so as to stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motion speed in the motion control at the time of producing a movable body and the motion control for confirming the actual motion is controlled to the above-described mode. Not limited to, for example, low speed → high speed → low speed → high speed → low speed → stop may be controlled so as to repeat low speed and high speed multiple times, and the operating speed changes in the order of low speed → medium speed → high speed. It may be controlled as follows.

Further, it may be controlled so that the change mode of the operation speed and the minimum speed are different between the forward operation and the return operation. If the minimum speed differs between the forward operation and the return operation, the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control is the one with the lower speed of the forward operation and the return operation in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The speed may be set to be less than or equal to the minimum speed.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation control for confirming the actual operation in the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 exemplifies a mode in which the movable body is accelerated and decelerated to change the operation speed. The invention is not limited to this, and the movable body may be controlled to operate at a single operating speed. When the movable body is controlled to operate at a single operating speed in this way, the single operating speed is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, so that the operation control during non-detection or the operation during detection The maximum speed in the operation control may be set to be equal to or less than the minimum speed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control as the first operation are executed in the second initialization process at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated. The timing is not limited to this (for example, after executing error processing including an accessory error and various other errors, at the start of symbol fluctuation, after executing a movable accessory effect, etc.). It may be executed at.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the order data of the movable accessory in the second initialization process, the first movable accessory 90300 → the second movable accessory 90400 → the operation module 90M (operation lever 9031) → the third movable accessory 90500. The mode in which the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed in the order of is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the order is arbitrary, as described above. In addition, each operation may be executed in an order other than the above. Further, any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control for two or more movable accessories may be executed together in parallel.

Further, a mode in which the operation control for confirming the actual operation is executed after executing the motion control at the time of non-detection or the motion control at the time of detection for all the movable bodies has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. After executing the non-detection motion control or detection motion control and the actual motion confirmation motion control of the moving body, the other non-detection motion control or detection motion control and the actual motion check motion control are executed. You may do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the process data for confirming the actual operation is described with the same operation content as the operation at the time of the actual production is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operation control for confirming the actual operation does not have to be exactly the same operation as long as it includes all the operations of the operation speed in the actual effect. For example, a plurality of effect operations in which some of the operations are different. If there is, it may be the process data for actual operation confirmation that describes the operation dedicated to confirmation that incorporates all the different production operations.

Further, in the above embodiment, an embodiment in which the number of operation error determinations of S90113, S90127, and S90213 is set to "3" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of operation error determinations is "3". The number of times other than "" may be appropriately set, and the number of operation error determinations for each of S90113, S90127, and S90213 may be different.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed in the second initialization process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, for example, the execution timing of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control can be arbitrarily set. For example, after the end of the movable body effect, when the variable display of the symbol is started, or when the demo effect is executed. You may execute it when you do.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls lent out in response to the player's request for renting and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored in the box. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and a prize is won according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It is also applicable to slot machines where is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game medium such as a medal. It may be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first state is a state in which the operating levers 9031, which are movable bodies, are all protruding, and the lever motor 9036 is not operating and is located at an operable position. , The lever motor 9036 that displaces the operating lever 9031 is operating, and the state in which the lever motor 9036 is being displaced from the operable position to the retracting position is set as the second state, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, in both the first state and the second state of the present invention, the lever motor 9036 is operating and the operating lever 9031 is being displaced from the retracted position to the operable position. The first state is set, and the state in which the operating lever 9031 is being displaced from the operable position to the retracted position is set as the second state, and the notification mode of the abnormality notification differs between the first state and the second state, that is, The abnormality notification of the second state in which a part of the player's body (for example, a finger) may be pinched may be notified in a notification mode in which the notification is likely to be recognized. .. When the initial position of the movable body is not the storage position as in the operation lever 9031 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the protruding protruding position is the initial position and the stored (sunk) storage position is In the case of the operating position, the state of displacement from the protruding position, which is the initial position, to the storage position, which is the operating position, is the first state, and the state of displacement from the storage position, which is the operating position, to the protruding position, which is the initial position, is the first state. Two states are set, and the notification mode of the abnormality notification is different between the first state and the second state, that is, the first state in which a part of the player's body (for example, a finger) may be pinched. The abnormality notification of the above may be notified in a notification mode in which the notification is likely to be recognized.

1 Pachinko game machine,
9 Production display device 27 Speaker 28 Frame LED
56 CPU
101 Production control CPU
100 Microcomputer for effect control 560 Microcomputer for game control AH Active display 901 Pachinko game machine 9031 Operation lever 9036 Lever motor 9038 Lever origin detection sensor 90120 CPU for effect control
90300 1st movable accessory 90302 1st movable portion 90303 1st movable accessory drive motor 90316 1st movable accessory origin detection sensor 90400 2nd movable accessory 90401, 90402 2nd movable portion 90411, 90421 2nd movable accessory drive Motors 90440A, 90440B Second movable accessory origin detection sensor 90500 Third movable accessory 90502 Third movable part 90520 Third movable accessory drive motor 90M Operation module

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A production execution means that can execute a production related to a game,
Setting means for setting the production based on the movement of the player,
With
The effect executing means can execute the effect at different progress speeds in the first period and the second period different from the first period.
The speed related to the setting in the setting means does not change between the first period and the second period.
further,
A movable body that is displaceable at a predetermined position that the player can contact,
A control means for controlling the displacement of the movable body and
At least an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification regarding the movable body, and
With
The movable body includes a first operating means that is interlocked and displaced, and a second operating means that is different from the first operating means, and can be displaced from the first position to a second position that is different from the first position. And
The first operating means can be displaced based on the operation of the player when it is located at either the first position or the second position.
The second operating means can be displaced based on the player's operation when it is located at the first position, and cannot be displaced when it is located at the second position.
When the player's operation on the second operating means is urged, it is highly expected that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than when the player's operation on the first operating means is urged.
If the displacement of the movable body is hindered at the first position before the control for displacement of the movable body to the second position is started, the control means does not start the control for displacement to the second position. At the same time, the abnormality notification means performs the first abnormality notification,
When the displacement of the movable body is hindered after the control to displace the movable body to the second position is started, the control means stops the control to displace the movable body to the second position and the abnormality notification means. Is a gaming machine characterized in that a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification is performed.